Artisan Technology Group is your source for

Artisan Technology Group is your source for
Artisan Technology Group is your source for quality
new and certified-used/pre-owned equipment
• FAST SHIPPING AND
DELIVERY
• TENS OF THOUSANDS OF
IN-STOCK ITEMS
• EQUIPMENT DEMOS
• HUNDREDS OF
MANUFACTURERS
SUPPORTED
• LEASING/MONTHLY
RENTALS
• ITAR CERTIFIED
SECURE ASSET SOLUTIONS
SERVICE CENTER REPAIRS
Experienced engineers and technicians on staff
at our full-service, in-house repair center
WE BUY USED EQUIPMENT
Sell your excess, underutilized, and idle used equipment
We also offer credit for buy-backs and trade-ins
www.artisantg.com/WeBuyEquipment
InstraView REMOTE INSPECTION
LOOKING FOR MORE INFORMATION?
Visit us on the web at www.artisantg.com for more
information on price quotations, drivers, technical
specifications, manuals, and documentation
SM
Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with
our interactive website at www.instraview.com
Contact us: (888) 88-SOURCE | [email protected] | www.artisantg.com
User Manual
DG2030
Data Generator
071-0059-50
This document applies to firmware version 1.00
and above.
www.tektronix.com
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix,
at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction
caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other
products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO
REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO
THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE
OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
TableĂofĂContents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xiii
xv
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cord Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standby Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-6
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-11
Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-8
2-10
2-13
Basic Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Item Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern Data Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area and Point Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popup Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-21
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-26
2-27
Operating Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Starting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Procedure Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Creating a Pattern and Storing into a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Loading and Editing a Pattern Stored in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: Signal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4: Creating a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-36
2-40
2-49
Getting Started
Operating Basics
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
i
Table of Contents
Reference
ii
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Operation Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Pattern Data and Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Control for Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-4
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Edit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Data & Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Data & Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSV Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Mark Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Memory Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Arrow Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Pattern Data Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Block Delimiter Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Current Block Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Current Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resize Current Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Execute Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste-replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Data To High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Data To Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert High Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Low Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invert Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Standard Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Register Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Code Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Sequence Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-40
3-41
3-43
3-43
3-45
3-48
3-50
3-51
3-55
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table of Contents
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Enhanced Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Editing Subsequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations on Using Subsequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Event Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
Setup Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Assign Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Bit(s) Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All bits Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Condition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Condition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z on Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Condition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Int FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ext FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
3-66
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-72
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-74
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-79
3-79
3-80
3-80
3-80
3-81
3-81
3-81
3-81
3-82
Application Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83
3-85
Mass Memory Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
iii
Table of Contents
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy or Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display/Hardcopy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Message Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power up Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset to Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
De-skew Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diag Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86
3-86
3-86
3-86
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-94
3-94
3-95
3-96
3-96
3-97
3-97
3-97
3-98
3-99
3-99
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Warranted Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A-7
A-9
A-13
Appendix B: Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Before Running the Operation Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Procedure Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Clock Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Clock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence & Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inhibit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Level, Amplitude, Rise Time and Fall Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . .
Delay Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B-4
B-5
B-7
B-7
B-10
B-12
B-25
B-28
B-33
Appendix C: Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Repackaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-2
C-4
C-6
Appendices
Index
iv
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table of Contents
ListĂofĂFigures
Figure 1-1: Rear panel power switch, fuse holder, and connector. . . .
Figure 1-2: Location of the ON/STBY switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
1-10
Figure 2-1: Front panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-2: Front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-3: Rear panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-4: Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-5: Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-6: Hardware block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-7: Inhibit Operation Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-8: Data structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-9: Menu and bezel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-10: DG2030 front-panel keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-11: Numeric entry in a menu item field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-12: General purpose knob and arrow buttons . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-13: Menu element knob icon and underscore . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-14: Timing display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-15: Table display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-16: Binary display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-17: Pattern data editing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-18: Area and Point cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-19: Text input menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-20: Popup message box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-21: Operating buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-22: Binary pattern creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-23: Pattern edited in example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-24: Group data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-25: Output assign list and channel assignment . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-26: Output channel data bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-27: Rise /fall time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-28: Output parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-29: DG2030 and oscilloscope connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-30: Example 4 block sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-31: Block separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-32: Creating a binary up-counter for block BK1 . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-10
2-11
2-15
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-32
2-35
2-39
2-42
2-44
2-44
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-51
2-53
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
v
Table of Contents
vi
Figure 2-33: Creating a binary down-counter for block BK3 . . . . . . .
Figure 2-34: Sample subsequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-35: Sample sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-36: Line pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-37: Sample sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-60
Figure 3-1: Operation flow for pattern data output #1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-2: Operation flow for pattern data output #2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-3: EDIT menu (timing display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-4: Import Configuration Menu
(File format: AWG2000 series waveform file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-5: Data write in terms of point positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-6: Data write in terms of data bit positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-7: The Export Config menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-8: Settings popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-9: Reference mark “M” display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-10: Arrow button action display (timing display) . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-11: The Arrow button menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-12: Block popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-13: Block relative cursor movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-14: Dividing a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-15: Combine blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-16: Change a block size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-17: Action popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-18: Edit area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-19: Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-20: Paste – insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-21: Paste – replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-22: Set data to high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-23: Set data to low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-24: Insert high data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-25: Insert low data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-26: Invert data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-27: Mirror vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-28: Mirror horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-29: Magnify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-30: Shift left (add zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-31: Shift right (add zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-32: Shift left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-7
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-16
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-38
3-39
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table of Contents
Figure 3-33: Shift right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-34: Rotate left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-35: Rotate right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-36: Standard pattern data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-37: Creating the clock pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-38: Clock Pattern popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-39: Register value and tap setting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-40: Shift Register Generator popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-41: Logical AND Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-42: Logical Operation popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-43: Bit Operation popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-44: Serial Code Converter menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-45: Edit Code Table menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-46: Make Sequence menu and a sequence example . . . . . . .
Figure 3-47: Make Subsequence menu and a subsequence example .
Figure 3-48: Example of a sequence expanded into
sequence memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-49: Event jump operation timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-50: SETUP menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-51: Group Assign popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-52: Bit structure assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-53: Output channel assign popup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-54: High-impedance control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-55: Example rise, fall, and delay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-56: Repeat Mode pattern data output
(when no sequence is defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-57: Repeat Mode pattern data output
(when a sequence is defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-58: Single Mode pattern data output
(when no sequence is defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-59: Single Mode pattern data output
(when a sequence is defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-60: Enhanced Mode sequence output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-61: Trigger slope and level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-62: Cal menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-63: Display/hardcopy menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-64: System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-65: De-skew menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-66: Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-67: Diag menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-48
3-50
3-51
3-53
3-55
3-56
3-60
3-61
3-64
3-66
3-67
3-69
3-72
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-90
3-90
3-94
3-98
3-99
3-99
vii
Table of Contents
viii
Figure A-1: Range of rise/fall times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A-2: Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
A-5
Figure B-1: Operating buttons and menu layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-2: Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-3: Frequency measurement connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-4: External clock input connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-5: Sequence & digital output connections #1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-6: Repeat mode timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-7: Single and step mode timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-8: Enhanced timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-9: Sequence & digital output connections #3 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-10: Inhibit function test connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-11: Output level measurement connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-12: Output amplitude, rise time and fall time
measurement connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-13: Delay time measurement connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4
B-5
B-7
B-10
B-12
B-14
B-16
B-19
B-23
B-25
B-28
B-33
B-34
Figure C-1: Conversion image example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-6
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table of Contents
ListĂofĂTables
Table 1-1: Power cord options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-2: Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-3: Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-4: Power cord identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-8
Table 2-1: DG2030 display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-2: Data structure terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-3: Run modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-4: Update modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-5: Bottom menu elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-6: Side and sub menu elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-7: Numeric input example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-11
2-13
2-14
2-17
2-17
2-19
Table 3-1: EDIT menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-2: Edit menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-3: Import parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-4: Export parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-5: Arrow button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-6: Pattern data display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-7: Block relative cursor movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-8: Numeric input differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-9: Standard pattern data descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-10: Parameter Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-11: Shift register generator parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-12: Logical operation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-13: Bit operation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-14: Serial code converter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-15: Edit Code Table parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-16: Numeric key description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-17: SETUP menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-18: Setup menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-19: Impedance state contol methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-20: SETUP menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-21: Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-22: Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-8
3-11
3-17
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-37
3-41
3-44
3-46
3-49
3-50
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-63
3-65
3-71
3-85
3-89
3-100
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
ix
Table of Contents
x
Table A-1: Warranted electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-2: Warranted environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-3: Electrical characteristics (typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-4: Period JItter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-5: Cycle to Cycle JItter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-6: Nominal traits - electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-7: Nominal traits - mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-8: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-9
A-12
A-13
Table B-1: Performance check disk’s file list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-2: Required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-3: Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-4: Internal clock frequency precision (PLL off) . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-5: High level output voltage accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-6: Low level output voltage accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-7: Output amplitude accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-8: Rise and fall time accuracies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B-3
B-6
B-9
B-30
B-31
B-31
B-32
Table C-1: External inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table C-2: Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
C-4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test
leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
xi
General Safety Summary
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
WARNING
High Voltage
xii
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
Double
Insulated
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Service Safety Summary
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service
procedures.
Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.
Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power by means
of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Use Caution When Servicing the CRT. To avoid electric shock or injury, use
extreme caution when handling the CRT. Only qualified personnel familiar with
CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT.
CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off.
Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to
chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to ground
and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode. Do not nick
or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it.
When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection.
Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.
XĆRadiation. To avoid x-radiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the
high-voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure. X-ray emissions generated within
this product have been sufficiently shielded.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
xiii
Service Safety Summary
xiv
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Preface
The User Manual for the DG2030 Data Generator contains the following
sections.
Getting Started covers the features of the DG2030, initial inspection, options and
accessories, installation procedures, and power on and off procedures. In
particular, the installation section covers the procedures required prior to turning
on the unit and areas of the instrument that require special care or caution.
Operating Basics introduces DG2030-specific terminology and provides an
overview of the instrument internal structure, operating principles, basic
operating procedures, and numeric input methods. This section also provides
basic signal editing examples.
Reference describes in detail the functions and use of the DG2030 main menus.
Appendices describe product specifications, performance verification instructions, and other information.
Related Manuals
Other documentation for the instrument includes:
H
The DG2030 Programmer Manual (Tektronix part number 071-0057-XX)
explains how to control the DG2030 with a computer through the GPIB or
RS-232-C interface. This manual is a standard accessory.
H
The DG2030 Service Manual (Tektronix part number 071-0058-XX)
describes how to maintain and service the DG2030, and provides a complete
module-level description of the instrument operation. This manual is an
optional accessory.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
xv
Preface
Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this manual.
H
Names of front panel controls and menu item names are in bold with the
same case (initial capitals or all upper case) as they appear on the unit itself.
For example, SETUP, Sub-sequence.
H
Sections 2, 3, and Appendix B describe instrument functions by using a table
to list a sequence of steps. Each operating procedure is presented in order
starting with step 1, and progresses until the end of the procedures. Execute
the action in the top-left table entry first. Then execute actions from left to
right along each row. When you are done executing the steps in one row,
move to the left end of the next row down, and continue executing the listed
steps until the end of the table.
For pop-up menus, use the general-purpose knob to select items from the
menu list. Operations such as operation 6 (below) do not involve pressing
the buttons shown in the row above, but rather are descriptions of operations
to be performed.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Operation 5
Operation 6 (for example, 'Use the generalĆpurpose knob to set cursor field to 128.')
Operation 7
xvi
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Preface
Contacting Tektronix
Phone
1Ć800Ć833Ć9200*
Address
Tektronix, Inc.
Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
Web site
www.tektronix.com
Sales support
1Ć800Ć833Ć9200, select option 1*
Service support
1Ć800Ć833Ć9200, select option 2*
Technical support
Email: [email protected]
1Ć800Ć833Ć9200, select option 3*
6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
*
This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
xvii
Preface
xviii
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
This section provides the following information:
H
Description and features of the DG2030
H
Initial inspection
H
Standard and optional accessories
H
Installation procedures
H
Power on and off procedures
Product Description
The DG2030 is a portable digital data generator designed for high performance
and ease of use. The DG2030 is easy to use for testing and evaluating semiconductors and logic circuits, which are continually becoming faster and more
complex.
The DG2030 provides high performance and a wide range of functions in a
compact package. The DG2030 includes the following features:
H
Maximum data rate of 400 MHz
H
256 K word pattern memory
H
Flexible sequence looping (which does the equivalent of over a billion word
patterns)
H
4 channels (with support for up to 8 channels by adding an optional module)
H
For each output channel:
H
Variable output levels (from –1.5 to +3.5 V, into 50 W)
H
10 pS timing skew adjustment function
H
Pulse rise and fall time setting (for 2 V p-p or higher output level)
H
Delay setting (20 ps resolution)
Any memory size from 90 words to 256 K words can be used easily, with no
restrictions within that range. Each of 8 bit data channels can be assigned to any
output channel. Output channels support setting of high and low output voltage
levels, rise and fall time, delay time, and output stages to a high-impedance state.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć1
Getting Started
The DG2030 also provides a 4000-step sequence controller, which enables the
generation of not only a data pattern longer than the pattern memory but also
dynamic pattern change triggered by external events.
The DG2030 provides flexible data editing functions, including word and line
unit input and extended data creation functions. Also, the DG2030 provides a
rich set of functions required for system construction, such as a sequencing
function, a jump function using external input, and an inhibit function.
Features
The following list just a few of the many features of the DG2030:
H
The DG2030 supports subassembly and system testing by simulating the
digital signals from incomplete sections of a product.
H
Logic function test systems can be constructed by combining this instrument
with a logic analyzer.
H
Margin tests can be performed by using the DG2030 to generate patterns that
have a low probability of occurrence or are difficult to generate.
H
Interactive digital simulation systems can be constructed using the sequence
output, external jump, and tri-state control functions.
H
Flexible data output functions make the DG2030 an ideal data generator for
simulation of LCD display units, CCD line and area sensors, and all types of
digital circuits.
Initial Inspection
Before unpacking the DG2030 from its shipping carton, inspect the package for
signs of external damage. If the carton is damaged, notify the carrier. The carton
contains the instrument and its standard accessories. Refer to the Standard
Accessories list in Section 1.
This instrument was thoroughly inspected for mechanical and electrical defects
before shipment. It should be free of dents or scratches. To confirm this, inspect
the instrument for physical damage that happened in transit, and test instrument
functionality, by following the Operating Examples in this manual. You can also
perform a full Performance Verification as listed in Appendix B. If a discrepancy
is found, contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.
NOTE. Save the shipping carton and packaging materials for repackaging in
case shipment becomes necessary.
1Ć2
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
Options
This section describes the options, and standard and optional accessories
available for the DG2030.
The following options are available:
Option 01 (8-channel output)
Option 1R (Rack mounting)
Each of these options will be discussed in detail in the following paragraphs.
Option 01 (8ĆChannel
Output)
Option 1R (Rack Mount)
This option adds 4 output ports for a total of 8 channels. Contact your Tektronix
sales representative if you intend to add this option to a DG2030 that you are
already using.
When option 1R is specified, the DG2030 is shipped configured for mounting in
a 19-inch rack. The floppy disk drive is moved so that it can be accessed from
the front panel in this instrument. Contact your Tektronix sales representative for
details on converting a non-rack mounting DG2030 to rack mounting.
See the instruction sheet provided with the rack mounting kit for details on the
rack mounting adapter.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć3
Getting Started
Power Cord Options
Table 1-1 lists the power cords available with the DG2030.
Table 1Ć1: Power cord options
Option
Description
Part number
A1
Europe, 220 V/6A
161Ć0104Ć06
A2
United Kingdom, 240 V/6A
161Ć0104Ć07
A3
Australia, 240 V/6A
161Ć0104Ć05
A4
North America, 240 V/6A
161Ć0104Ć08
A5
Switzerland, 220 V/6A
161Ć0167Ć00
Accessories
Standard Accessories
Table 1-2 lists the standard accessories provided with the DG2030.
Table 1Ć2: Standard accessories
Standard accessory
Part number
User Manual (this manual)
071Ć0059ĆXX
Programmer Manual
071Ć0057ĆXX
Performance Check Disk, 3.5Ćinch
063Ć2922ĆXX
GPIB Sample Program Disk, 3.5Ćinch
063Ć2921ĆXX
DGĆLINK Application Program Disk, 3.5Ćinch
063Ć2920ĆXX
Power cord 125 V/6A
161Ć0230Ć01
Certificate of Calibration
1Ć4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
Optional Accessories
Table 1-3 lists the optional accessories that are recommended for use with the
DG2030.
Table 1Ć3: Optional accessories
Optional accessory
Part number
Service Manual
071Ć0058ĆXX
Front Cover
200Ć3232ĆXX
Accessory Pouch
016Ć1159ĆXX
Rackmount kit
040Ć1444ĆXX
Fuse 6A Fast (UL198G/3AG)
159Ć0239ĆXX
Fuse cap
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC127)
Fuse cap
200Ć2264ĆXX
159Ć0210ĆXX
200Ć2265ĆXX
GPIB Cable
012Ć0991ĆXX
50 W BNC Cable, 2m
012Ć1342ĆXX
50 W BNC Cable (Double shield)
012Ć1256ĆXX
50 W SMB Cable, 1 m
012Ć1458ĆXX
50 W BNC to SMB Cable, 1 m
012Ć1459ĆXX
50 W termination
011Ć0049Ć02
50 W BNC Power Divider
015Ć0660ĆXX
Output Cable, 50 W SMB to PinĆheader Cable, 50 cm
012Ć1503ĆXX
Output Cable, 50 W SMB to PinĆheader Cable, 127 cm
012Ć1506ĆXX
Adaptor, 50 W SMB to BNC
015Ć0671ĆXX
Lead Set, 1 ch lead set (set of 5) 1
012Ć1508ĆXX
Lead Set, 4 ch lead set (set of 3) 1
012Ć1509ĆXX
1
Used to provide the flexible connection for output signal and grounding by attaching
to the pinĆheader end of the 50 W cable (SMB to pin header or pin header to pin
header).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć5
Getting Started
Installation
Before installation, refer to the Safety Summary at the front of this manual for
power source, grounding, and other safety information.
Before you use the instrument, ensure that it is properly installed and powered
on. To properly install and power on the instrument, perform the following steps:
1. Check that the operating environment is correct.
The DG2030 operates correctly in ambient temperatures from +10_ C to
+40_ C and relative humidity from 20% to 80%. If the instrument is stored
at temperatures outside this usage temperature range, do not switch on the
power until the chassis has come within the operating temperature range. For
more operating environment information, refer to Appendix A, Specifications.
NOTE. If you are installing the instrument in the dedicated rack, refer to the
instruction sheet that comes with the rack mounting kit.
2. Before switching on the power, double check that there is nothing blocking
the flow of air at the fan and air intake holes.
the instrument takes in outside air and cools itself by forcibly exhausting air
with the fan on its left side. Leave space at the sides of the instrument so that
the heat generated within the instrument does not build up and harm the
operation. There are holes for air intake on the sides and bottom of the
cabinet. After switching on the power, double check that the fan is turning.
Here are the minimums for the space at the sides of the instrument.
Top and bottom : 2.5 cm (1 inche)
Left and right : 15.0 cm (6 inches)
Rear :
7.5 cm (3 inches)
WARNING. Always unplug the power cord from the socket before checking the
line fuse.
3. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder on the rear panel and check the fuse.
To remove the fuse, turn it counter-clock-wise with a screwdriver while
pushing it in. There are two types of fuses provided. Here is the fuse type
and rating.
1Ć6
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
Fuse
Fuse part number
Fuse cap
part number
0.25 inch × 1.25 inch (UL 198G,3AG)Ă: 6A
FAST, 250 V
159Ć0239ĆXX
200Ć2264ĆXX
5 mm × 20 mm (IEC 127)Ă:Ă5A (T), 250 V
159Ć0210ĆXX
200Ć2265ĆXX
NOTE. The second fuse listed in the table above is approved under the IEC
standards. This fuse is used in equipment sold in the European market.
4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The DG2030 operates
within the following power supply voltage and frequency ranges:
Line voltage range
90 V - 250 V
Line frequency
48 Hz - 440 Hz (90 V - 127 V)
48 Hz - 63 Hz (127 V - 250 V)
Maximum power
300 W
CAUTION. The DG2030 is shipped with a power cord appropriate for use with
normal 115 V power systems. If the DG2030 is to be used with 230 V power, the
power cord must be replaced with one appropriate for the power source used.
See Table 1-4, Power cord identification, for the available power cord types.
5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear panel power connector to the
power system.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć7
Getting Started
Table 1Ć4: Power cord identification
Plug configuration
1Ć8
Normal usage
Option number
North America
125 V
Standard
Europe
230 V
A1
United Kingdom
230 V
A2
Australia
230 V
A3
North America
230 V
A4
Switzerland
230 V
A5
North American
115 V/15A Plug
NEMA 5Ć20P
1A
North American
120/208 V 3ĆPhase Plug
NEMA L21Ć30P
1B
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
Standby Power
6. Push the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH (shown in Figure 1-1) on the
rear panel of the instrument. Power is now applied to the standby circuit of
the instrument. Once the instrument is installed, leave the PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH on and use the ON/STBY switch as the power switch.
Power Connector
Fuse
PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH
Figure 1Ć1: Rear panel power switch, fuse holder, and connector.
Power On
7. Press the ON/STBY switch (shown in Figure 1-2) on the lower left side of
the front panel to switch on the power for the instrument.
NOTE. the instrument needs to be warmed up for at least 20 minutes and then be
calibrated for the clock in order to operate at its optimum precision.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć9
Getting Started
ON/STBY Switch
Figure 1Ć2: Location of the ON/STBY switch
StartĆup Diagnostics
8. The DG2030 automatically runs diagnostics when the instrument is turned
on from the ON/STBY switch. These diagnostics check whether the
instrument is performing within its defined operating characteristics. If all
the diagnostic items have been completed without error, the instrument
displays the EDIT menu.
If an error is detected, the instrument displays a fail and error code message.
You can exit this state by pressing any front-panel button to display the
EDIT menu. However, until the error is corrected, the instrument performance cannot be relied on.
If the instrument chassis temperature is outside the specified operating range,
an error will occur during the power-up diagnostics. If this happens, turn off
the instrument, wait until the chassis temperature is within normal operating
range, and then switch the power on again.
NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative if an error is
displayed.
1Ć10
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Getting Started
Power Off
To power off the DG2030, press the ON/STBY switch.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1Ć11
Getting Started
1Ć12
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
This section provides the following information:
H
An overview of the instrument controls and their functions.
H
An overview of the DG2030 hardware.
H
Operations commonly performed on the instrument and how to enter
numbers.
H
Simple examples showing how to edit, save, and recall pattern data.
Functional Overview
This section describes the terminology and functions of the DG2030 front, side,
and rear panel controls. This section also describes the terminology and content
of representative screen displays.
Front Panel
Figure 2-1 shows the layout of the DG2030 front panel. Figure 2-2 describes
each front-panel control in detail.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć1
Operating Basics
See Figure 2Ć2.
Bottom and side
bezel buttons
The main use of the bottom buttons is
to call up sub menus, and the side
buttons are used to execute more
detailed operations within the sub
menus.
ON/STBY Button
CLEAR MENU Button
Output Connectors
This button is used as the
power switch in normal
operation. The PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH on the rear
panel must be on.
Cancels the current operation
and closes side and sub menus.
The display can be returned to
the top level by repeated
pressing.
The CH 0 to CH 3 BNC connectors output pattern
data with variable output lebel in the range -1.50
V to +3.50 V. The delay times for each channel
can be varied from -5 ns to +18 ns.
CAUTION: If external voltages are applied
to the data output connectors, be sure to set
the highĆimpedance control correctly so that
signal collisions do not result in output
currents or voltages in excess of the rated
values.
Figure 2Ć1: Front panel overview
2Ć2
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
START/STOP Button
Starts or stops pattern data output. When automatic pattern data update is not used, the pattern data is
updated before output is started.
The indicator lights in the output state. It will flash when there is a discrepancy between the output data and
the displayed data due to pattern data not being updated.
When automatic pattern data update is specified, the indicator flashes rapidly during data update. It flashes
slowly when automatic update is not performed and data update is required.
Refer to Update on page 3Ć78 for update mode.
CURSOR Button
Activates or switches
the cursor. The lamp
indicates that the
general purpose knob
will move the cursor.
Arrow Buttons
The arrow buttons move the
cursor. They are also used for
special functions that are
described on the screen when
enabled.
EXECUTE Button
Executes the edit
operation set up with the
EDIT menu. Confirms
selection operations in
selection screens.
General Purpose Knob
Controls several functions
and adjusts numeric values.
The knob icon displayed on
the screen indicates that this
knob controls the item.
HARDCOPY Button
Makes a hard copy of the
current screen. The indicator
flashes while in progress.
STEP/EVENT Button
Advances the
pattern data by 1
step when in step
mode.
FORCE TRIGGER Button
Generates a trigger event.
Generates an event
pulse when the run
mode is enhanced
mode.
TRIGGER INPUT
BNC connector accepts an
external trigger signal.
MENU Buttons
These buttons are
the main menu
buttons. When
pressed, the menu
is displayed and the
corresponding
indicator lights.
CAUTION: Only apply
signals within the stipulated
ranges to the TRIGGER
INPUT connector. Signals
that exceed those ranges
can damage the instrument.
ENTER Key
Numeric Keys, Units Buttons
The numeric keys enter values in numeric or character
input mode. The characters A to F are allocated to keys for
hexadecimal input. Instructions are displayed when used
for other operations.
When a units button appropriate for the input item is
pressed, the input value and unit are confirmed.
Confirms numeric and
character input.
CLOCK OUT
Refer to Specifications on page AĆ1
for output levels.
Delete Key
Deletes previously input digits
during numeric input. Deletes the
character directly in front of the
cursor during character input.
CAUTION: Do not apply external
voltages to the CLOCK OUT
connector. Applying external signal
voltages can damage the instrument.
Figure 2Ć2: Front panel controls
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć3
Operating Basics
Rear Panel
Figure 2-3 shows the rear panel signal and power connectors.
CAUTION: Only apply signals within the stipulated range to the AUX INPUT
connector. Voltages in excess of the stipulated range can damage the instrument.
IEEE STD 488 Connector
CLOCK IN Connector
This is a GPIB connector for
remote computer control
through an IEEE 488
standard parallel interface.
Refer to Specifications
on page AĆ1 for proper
input levels.
INHIBIT IN Connector
BNC connector accepts a
TTL level inhibit signal.
SYNC OUT Connector
RSĆ232ĆC Connector
The RSĆ232ĆC connector is
used for remote computer
control over a serial interface.
BNC connector provides a TTL
level synchronization output signal.
EVENT IN Connector
Power Connector
BNC Connector accepts a TTL
level event input signal.
EVENT OUT Connector
PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH
BNC connector provides a
TTL level event output signal.
Output Connectors (Option 01 Only)
Connect the provided power
cable to this connector.
This switch applies power to the standby
circuit. In addition to this switch being on,
the front panel ON/STBY switch must
also be turned on.
Power Supply Fuse Holder
The CH4 to CH7 BNC connectors output pattern data with variable
output levels in the range -1.50 V to +3.50 V. The delay times for each
channel can be varied from -5 ns to +18 ns.
The same 6A fastĆblow fuse
is used for both 115V and
230V systems.
CAUTION: If external voltages are applied to the data output connectors, be sure
to set the highĆimpedance control correctly so that signal collisions do not result
in output currents or voltages in excess of the rated values.
Figure 2Ć3: Rear panel connectors
2Ć4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
Floppy Disk Drive
Figure 2-4 shows the floppy disk drive controls and indicators. The floppy disk
drive is located on the right side of the DG2030 chassis. You use the floppy disk
drive to save and recall instrument pattern and setting data.
CAUTION. Do not press the eject button while the DG2030 is writing to the
floppy disk. Doing so can cause data corruption on the floppy disk.
LED indicator
When the disk drive is in operation, the
LED indicator is lit.
Eject button
Remove a floppy disk by pressing the
eject button.
Figure 2Ć4: Floppy disk drive
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć5
Operating Basics
Display Elements
Figure 2-5 shows the display elements, including bottom and side menus, work
area, status lines, and so on. Also shown are a popup menu and message box.
Table 2-1 describes each element in detail.
1
2
6
3
5
4
7
8
Figure 2Ć5: Display elements
2Ć6
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
Table 2Ć1: DG2030 display elements
Figure
number
Label
Description
1
Status area
Displays the current status of the instrument. This status
line is always displayed, whichever menu is displayed.
The status line displays the following four items.
Page
MODE: Displays the run mode in which pattern data will
be output.
3Ć75
UPDATE: Displays the update method for pattern data
output when data is updated.
3Ć78
PLL: Displays whether or not the PLL circuit is used as
the internal oscillator circuit.
3Ć82
In addition, there is also a disk icon that indicates
whether or not a floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive.
A clock icon may also be displayed at the left end of the
status line. When this icon is displayed, the instrument is
busy with internal processing and cannot accept other
inputs.
2
Date and Time
display area
The date and time display can be turned on or off using
the UTILITY menu.
3
Side menu
Related side menu items are displayed here when a
bottom menu item is selected. The topmost entry in the
side menu displays either a label representing the side
menu or the operation name for the confirmed item.
4
Bottom menu
When one of the buttons in the menu section is pressed,
the corresponding bottom menu is displayed. When a
bottom menu item is selected the corresponding side
menu is displayed. Selecting the same bottom menu
item again closes the side menu.
5
Button function
description
area
Displays descriptions of the functions of the front panel
buttons.
6
Message disĆ
play area
Displays messages that report on the current processing
state. This area can be also used by remote commands
to display user messages.
7
Popup mesĆ
sage box
When required, the instrument temporarily displays a
window at the center of the screen to display a warning
or question for the user.
8
Popup menu
The instrument sometimes displays a popĆup menu
when a bottom menu or side menu item is selected.
Enter a numeric value or select an item using either the
general purpose knob or the front panel buttons.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć91
2Ć7
Operating Basics
Theory of Operation
This section presents an overview of the DG2030 hardware, data structures, and
operating modes to allow you to take full advantage of the DG2030.
Block Diagram
Figure 2-6 shows the main hardware blocks that make up the instrument. This
section describes these hardware blocks to provide the background knowledge
necessary to use the instrument effectively.
Inhibit Input
Event Input
Pattern Generation Unit
Pattern
Control
Circuit
Output Channels
Pattern Memory
Clock Output
Event Output
Sync Output
Sequence Memory
Pattern Generation Unit (Option 01)
Clock Input
Clock Unit
Data Output
(CH0 to CH3)
Data Output
(CH4 to CH7)
Clock
Trigger Input
Bus
PLL
GPIB
RS232C
Front Panel
CPU Unit
CPU
ROM
RAM
GPIB
RS232C
Display
Floppy Disk Drive
Figure 2Ć6: Hardware block diagram
2Ć8
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
CPU Unit
The CPU unit controls the instrument. The CPU unit includes ROM, RAM, and
an I/O interface.
The ROM memory holds the program code that implements all the supported
functions. The ROM contents are loaded at the factory.
The RAM memory holds a variety of information required by the CPU. The
contents of RAM change according to the instrument’s operating state. Since the
contents of RAM are retained by a built-in battery even when the instrument is
turned off, the main instrument settings will still be in effect the next time the
instrument is turned on. The pattern data memory and the sequence data
memory, which are described later as a conceptual data model, are actually stored
in one section of this RAM.
External interfaces include GPIB and RS-232 interfaces for remote control, a
floppy disk drive controller, and a user interface consisting of the display and the
front panel.
Pattern Generation Unit
The pattern generation unit generates digital pattern signals based on the pattern
data and sequence data specified by the user. This unit includes a pattern control
circuit, pattern memory, and sequence memory.
Pattern memory and sequence memory are high-speed memories that hold the
pattern data and sequence data, which are described later in this section. These
memories supply pattern data to the pattern control circuit.
Clock Unit
The clock unit generates the clock signals that generate the data patterns. It also
detects and synchronizes external trigger signals.
You can select whether the phase-lock-loop (PLL) circuit is used in clock signal
generation or not. When the PLL circuit is used (PLL on), the clock unit
generates a clock signal synchronized to an internal crystal oscillator. This
provides an output with excellent frequency precision. When the PLL circuit is
not used (PLL off), the clock unit can generate a clock output synchronized with
an external trigger signal, although the frequency precision is lower. The PLL
circuit can be turned on or off depending on the application.
Output Channels
The output channels provide variable output levels and digital signals to the
device under test.
The output channels level-convert the pattern signals from the pattern generation
unit to output signals appropriate for the device under test. They also handle fine
adjustment of specific bit timing.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć9
Operating Basics
Inhibit Function
The output channels support a function that sets their outputs to the high-impedance state. Inhibit level and inhibit control can be set, as parameters, for each
output channel. For all channels, the external or internal inhibit signal, or the
logical OR of those two signals can be selected as the high-impedance control
signal. Channel 0 controls the internal inhibit.
Inhibit Input
or CH0
T1
T1
Data Output
T1: The delay time from an external inhibit input or a CH0 signal until the corresponding data
output goes to the highĆimpedance state, or the delay from the highĆimpedance state until
highĆ or lowĆlevel data is available. Refer to Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5 for more information.
Figure 2Ć7: Inhibit Operation Timing
Display and Front Panel
The display and front panel implement the user interface.
The display is a 16-level monochrome 640 480 pixel CRT. The front panel
consists of menu buttons, numeric keys, bezel buttons, a general-purpose knob
for changing numeric values and item selection, and several signal output
connectors.
Data Structure Overview
To make full and efficient use of the DG2030, you need to understand the
DG2030 data structures. This section presents an overview of the pattern data,
setup data, and sequence data. Figure 2-8 shows the DG2030 data structures that
are described in the following sections. Table 2-2 lists the data structure related
technical terms that appear frequently in the operating procedure descriptions.
2Ć10
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
Block Delimiter
Block
Group
Block
Block
Block
D7
D6
Output
Channels
D5
Group
D4
D3
Group
Group
D2
D1
D0
Group
Allocation
Pattern Data
Output Channel
Allocation
Figure 2Ć8: Data structures
Table 2Ć2: Data structure terms
Term
Meaning
Pattern data
Basic data for patterns, consisting of 8Ćbit words
Memory size
The number of pattern data words (90 to 256 K words)
Group allocation
Definitions of pattern data bit combinations
Block delimiter
Delimiter that defines pattern data start and stop points
Block division
Pattern data division by block delimiters
Output channel allocation
Definition of the correspondence relation ship between pattern
data and output bits
Setup data
Settings for the above items
Sequence data
Pattern output sequence program
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć11
Operating Basics
Pattern Data
Pattern data is the basic data that defines the digital signals to be output. The
pattern data is a collection of 8-bit words. The total number of words is called
the memory size. The memory size can be any value from a minimum of
90 words to a maximum of 256 K words (262,144).
Once pattern data has been transferred to the pattern memory in the pattern
generation unit hardware it can actually be output as digital signals. Pattern
memory consists of 8-bit words, with the 8 bits in a one-to-one correspondence
with the 8 output channels. The definition of the relationship between pattern
data bits and pattern memory bits is called output channel allocation.
The pattern data to pattern memory transfer operation is either performed
automatically each time the data is modified, or you can manually cause the
transfer to occur. This is called the data update mode, and it can be selected by
user.
Setup Data
There are a large number of settings that define data structures and relationships
between data items and that specify output channel states and other parameters.
These settings are collectively referred to as the setup data. Since this data is
associated with the pattern data, it is handled together with the pattern data in
operations such as saving instrument settings and data to a floppy disk.
The setup data includes a wide range of settings, including output voltage levels,
slope of edge, delay, high impedance control, clock frequency and PLL settings
in addition to the definitions described here.
2Ć12
Groups
Although each bit in the pattern data can be defined independently, it is easier to
edit and display data if multiple bits are collected and handled as a single group.
Any set of bits can be assigned as a group. However, the bits assigned to a group
must be adjacent to each other. For example, D0 through D3 can be assigned into
a group, but D0, D1, and D5 can not (D1 and D5 are not adjacent).
Blocks
Pattern data can be divided into blocks. A block is a user-specified range of
pattern data identified with a unique label. Blocks are divided by setting
delimiters called block delimiters. Block delimiters are set in word units.
Sequences, which are described later, control data output in block units.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Basics
Sequence Data
The sequence data is a program that specifies the order in which the pattern data
is output. The sequence data is used to set up operations such as iteratively
putting out blocks of pattern data for a specified number of times, and jumping
to a specified block when an external event occurs. Sequences allow long
patterns to be set up without preparing large quantities of data.
Sequences can include other sequences (called subsequences) so that you can
make complex sequence program easier. Sequence data is transferred to the
pattern generation unit sequence memory, and controls the operation of the
pattern control circuit. Using the run mode, which is described in detail later, you
can select whether all the sequence data is valid or whether enhanced mode
settings such as event jumps in the sequence are ignored.
Operating Modes Overview
Run Modes
In the run modes, pattern output is controlled by the pattern generation unit’s
pattern control circuit. The DG2030 supports four run modes: repeat, single,
step, and enhanced. These run modes are specified with the SETUP → Run
Mode menu. Table 2-3 provides functional information for each mode.
Table 2Ć3: Run modes
Run mode
Function
Repeat
Repeats the pattern data from the first to last data point indefinitely.
If a sequence is defined, iterates the output according to that
sequence.
Single
Outputs the pattern data once from the first to last data point in point
order. If a sequence is defined, outputs the pattern once according to
that sequence.
Step
Operates identically to repeat mode, except that just one data point
is output each time the STEP/EVENT button is pressed.
Enhanced
Same as Repeat with the addition that event jumps and trigger waits
are also effective.
NOTE. The Repeat, Single, and Step modes ignore the event jump and trigger
wait settings.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć13
Operating Basics
Update Modes
When pattern data or sequence data is created or edited, or the output channel
allocations are changed, the pattern that is actually output will not be updated
until the new settings are transferred to the pattern generation unit.
There are two update methods: auto and manual. The update modes are set up
with the Update item in the SETUP ! Run Mode menu. Table 2-4 provides
functional information for both modes.
Table 2Ć4: Update modes
Update mode
Function
Auto
Changes are reflected in the hardware as soon as they are entered.
Manual
Changes are reflected in the hardware when specified by you.
NOTE. The response to edit operations while in Auto mode may be slow when
there is a large amount of data being edited. In such cases, it is more efficient to
perform a number of edit operations and then update the output data in manual
mode.
2Ć14
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
This section describes the DG2030 menu system and numeric input methods.
Menu Operations
The instrument’s menu system is used for instrument settings, instrument
operation, and pattern data output parameter selection. Pressing one of the menu
buttons at the center of the instrument’s front panel displays one of the menus
that forms the basis of DG2030 operation. There are four menu buttons, EDIT,
SETUP, APPLICATION, and UTILITY, as shown in Figure 2-9.
The menu items displayed on the screen are selected by pressing the corresponding bottom or side bezel button. The bezel buttons consist of seven bottom
buttons and five side buttons, as shown in Figure 2-9.
Side Buttons
Menu
Buttons
Bottom Buttons
Figure 2Ć9: Menu and bezel buttons
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć15
Basic Menu Operation
When the target menu item is selected, the selection items and numeric input
entries controlled by that menu are displayed. Items can be selected or numeric
values changed using the numeric keys and the general purpose knob.
Selecting a menu item causes one of the following operations:
H
A lower level menu is invoked.
H
An item is selected:
H
The selected item changes each time a bezel button is pressed.
H
A list is displayed and an item is selected from that list.
H
Numeric input is enabled.
H
The function associated with the menu item is executed as soon as the menu
item is selected.
Menu Notation
The following notation is used in this manual to show the order to push
instrument buttons:
Front panel menu button ! Bottom menu button ! [Side menu button or
popup menu item]
The menu path starts with a front panel menu button, followed by an arrow (!),
and then a bottom menu. The item in parenthesis may be repeated more than
once, as needed. For example, SETUP ! Output Condition ! Control
Condition ! Change Inhibit Control ! Both ! OK is executed as follows:
1. Press the SETUP button on the front panel.
2. Press the Output Condition bottom button.
3. Press the Control Condition side button.
4. Press the Change Inhibit Control side button.
5. Select Both from the popup menu.
6. Press the OK side button.
2Ć16
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Menu Item Display
Starting with each main menu, the instrument displays bottom, side, and sub
menu items according to fixed rules.
Bottom Menu
The bottom menu change according to whether items are selected or not, and
whether an item is valid or not, as shown in Table 2-5.
Table 2Ć5: Bottom menu elements
Menu item
Description
Menu item in the unselected state. The small box in the upper right
corner is black.
Menu item in the selected state. The small box in the upper right
corner is white.
Menu item that cannot be selected since it is invalid in the current
state.
Side and Sub Menus
The menu items that are manipulated with the side buttons, can be classified
according to the manipulations they support. These menu items can be differentiated visually as shown in Table 2-6.
Table 2Ć6: Side and sub menu elements
Menu Item
Description
Menu item
Description
Menu items that execute a
function immediately
Menu items that call up
sub menus
Menu items that switch
between on and off each
time the side button is
pressed.
Menu items that allow
selections to be made
with the general purpose
knob
Menu items that allow
numeric values to be set
using the numeric keys or
the general purpose knob
Menu items that cannot
be used in the current
instrument state
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć17
Basic Menu Operation
Numeric Input
You enter numeric values by using the front-panel keypad or the general purpose
knob. This section describes these numeric input methods.
FrontĆPanel Keypad
The numeric keys, the units buttons, the delete key and the ENTER key are used
for entering numeric values. See Figure 2-10.
7
8
9
ns
4
5
6
MHz/ms
1
2
3
kHz/ms/mV
0
.
A
Numeric
Keys
B
F
E
Delete
Key
D
Hz/s/V
C
Units
Buttons
ENTER
ENTER
Key
Figure 2Ć10: DG2030 frontĆpanel keypad
Using the Keypad
Use the following procedure to input numeric values with the numeric keys,
ENTER key, and units buttons on the front panel.
1. Press the button for the menu item to be changed.
2. Input the value using the numeric keys.
3. Press a units button or the ENTER key.
Figure 2-11 shows a menu display during numeric input. The asterisk to the left
of the menu items indicates that you are entering a value in that field. Pressing
the front panel ENTER key confirms an entered value and removes the asterisk
from the menu item field.
2Ć18
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Figure 2Ć11: Numeric entry in a menu item field
Numeric Input Example
This example shows how to change the clock frequency to 12.3 Hz when the
value before entering the input state was 100.0 Hz. When the 1, 2, ., 3, and
ENTER keys are pressed in that order, the numeric input box changes as shown
in Table 2-7.
Table 2Ć7: Numeric input example
Press keys in this order
Numeric input window display
State of the value
100 Hz
PreĆnumeric input
1
*
1
2
*
12
.
*
12.
3
*
12.3
ENTER
12.30000 Hz
Numeric input
p
in progress
Value confirmed
Pressing a units button after a value has been entered confirms both the value
and the unit in a single operation. Pressing a units button before entering the
input state changes only the unit without changing the value.
If you switch to another menu item after entering a value but without pressing
either the ENTER key or a units button, the entered value is discarded and the
value returns to its previous value. If a value outside the allowable range of a
parameter is set, the value will be replaced with the largest or smallest value
allowable for that parameter.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć19
Basic Menu Operation
Setting Values with the
General Purpose Knob
The general purpose knob and the left and right arrow buttons can be used to set
values in numeric input boxes. The knob icon is displayed close to the box to
show that you can use the general purpose knob to enter values. The general
purpose knob is used to increase or decrease the value of the digit indicated by
the underscore. Rotating the knob to the left decreases the value and rotating it to
the right increases the value. Figures 2-12 and 2-13 show the general–purpose
knob, the arrow keys, and the appearance of a menu element that can use the
general purpose knob to enter numeric values
CURSOR
EXECUTE
Arrow Buttons
General Purpose Knob
Figure 2Ć12: General purpose knob and arrow buttons
Knob Icon
Underscore
Figure 2Ć13: Menu element knob icon and underscore
You do not need to use the front panel ENTER key to confirm a value when
using the general purpose knob to change a value. The input value is confirmed
automatically without pressing the ENTER key.
2Ć20
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Use the following procedure to change a value with the general purpose knob.
1. Press the button for the menu item to be changed.
2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to move the underscore line to the digit
to be modified.
The front panel arrow buttons control the amount of change that can be
achieved with the general purpose knob. Pressing the a button moves the
underscore one digit to the left and thus multiplies the effect of turning the
general purpose knob by ten. Inversely, pressing the ' button moves the
underscore one digit to the right and reduces the effect of turning the general
purpose knob by a factor of ten.
3. Change the value by turning the general purpose knob.
Pattern Data Display Format
You can display pattern data in one of three formats: timing display, table
display, and binary display. Use the EDIT ! Settings item to select the display
format. Figures 2-14 through 2-16 show the three display formats.
Figure 2Ć14: Timing display format
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć21
Basic Menu Operation
Figure 2Ć15: Table display format
Figure 2Ć16: Binary display format
The Timing display format shows the waveform patterns for the data graphically
with the time axis in the horizontal direction. The TIming display shows the data
so that data transitions and the relationships between bits can be easily grasped.
The Table display format shows the data for each clock as numeric values for
each group.
The Binary display format shows the data bit states for each clock as 0 or 1. This
is the basic display for digital signals, and is an appropriate format for handling
data in bit units. If no groups are defined, data can only be displayed in binary
format.
2Ć22
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Note that the values of the grouped data are displayed with the bits that form
those groups converted to hexadecimal in the Timing and Table display formats.
Displaying multiple bits grouped in this manner is called bus display. The binary
display format displays each bit independently, regardless of the group definitions.
While the same output results whichever display format is selected, these display
formats have the following distinguishing features. Use these different formats
according to your needs.
Edit Operations
The DG2030 user interface eliminates problems found in many other graphical
signal editors. Most user interfaces that adopt graphical menu items execute
editing operations as soon as that operation is selected from a menu. This
method has the problem that operation becomes inefficient if the same operation
must be repeated many times. Another problem is that the screen area is not large
enough to make selections from the editing operations menu items while
checking the data being edited on the screen. The DG2030’s user interface was
designed with these points in mind. The DG2030 pattern data editing functions
separates the selection and execution of editing operations.
The different editing operations are selected from the EDIT ! Execute Action
menu. Pressing the front panel EXECUTE button executes the selected
operation. Editing can be accomplished quickly by using the general purpose
knob and the CURSOR button to move the cursor and then pressing the
EXECUTE button. Figure 2-17 shows the procedure used to select the Invert
data editing operation and then invert data bits at three locations.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć23
Basic Menu Operation
1 Select Invert data.
Execute Action menu
Move the cursor to the numbered positions.
At each position, press the EXECUTE button
to take the selected action.
2
Before
execution
3
4
After
execution
Pattern data
Figure 2Ć17: Pattern data editing procedure
Area and Point Cursors
When editing pattern data, there are two types of cursors used for indicating the
data that will be the object of the edit operation. The type of cursor-used depends
on whether a particular point in the data must be indicated, or an area of data
must be indicated.
Each type of cursor has a different form. They are called the area cursor and the
point cursor. Figure 2-18 shows these cursors.
2Ć24
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Cursor Window
Width Window
Cursor Window Value
Knob Icon
Point Cursor
Area Cursor
Scope
Width Window Value
Figure 2Ć18: Area and Point cursors
The area cursor is used to select a range of signal data, such as during a copy
operation. In this operation, the data in the area specified by the area cursor is
copied to the edit buffer memory. The paste operation is an example where the
point cursor is used. In this operation, data that was previously loaded into the
edit buffer memory is copied into pattern memory at the point specified by the
point cursor.
The area cursor’s area is determined by a combination of an area origin (as
defined by a data group and a sample point position), the number of points
(which corresponds to the width of the area) and the scope (which corresponds to
the height of the area). The origin data group is set with the up and down arrow
buttons. The area cursor origin sample point is displayed in the Cursor window
at the upper left of the screen in the same way as the point cursor is displayed,
and can be manipulated in the same way as the point cursor.
The width of the area cursor is displayed in the Width window, and can be set
with the general purpose knob or numeric keys when the knob icon has been
moved to the Width window using the CURSOR button. Use the EDIT !
Execute Action ! Set Scope item to set the area cursor height.
The position of the point cursor is determined by a data group and a sample
point. The data group is set with the vertical arrow buttons. The sample point
position is displayed in the Cursor window at the upper left of the screen. It can
be set with the general purpose knob or the numeric keys when the knob icon has
been moved to the Cursor window with the front panel CURSOR button.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć25
Basic Menu Operation
Text Input
Text input is required to enter the names for data groups, data blocks, floppy disk
files, and other items. When such input is required, the instrument brings up the
dialog box shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2Ć19: Text input menu
The text input menu displays a default string for the item. Use the side menu
Clear String button to erase this default string. Use the arrow buttons or the
general purpose knob to move the reverse-video cursor to the desired character in
the letter/digit matrix, and pressing the EXECUTE button. Incorrect input can
be erased with the delete key. The position where the character is inserted is
indicated with an underscore. Use the left and right arrow buttons to change the
position of the underscore. When all required characters have all been selected,
press the OK button on the side menu to complete the operation. To cancel text
input and return to the previous menu, press Cancel on the side menu.
Popup Message Box
The instrument displays a message box that prompts you to confirm operations
that would be difficult to recover. Figure 2-20 shows the file deletion confirmation message box. Press the side menu OK button to execute the operation
displayed in the box. Press Cancel to cancel the operation and return to the state
prior to selecting the current menu.
Figure 2Ć20: Popup message box
2Ć26
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Menu Trees
Menu trees are shown for the EDIT, SETUP, and UTILITY menus.
Edit Menu Tree
MENU Button
EDIT
Bottom Menu
Side Menu or Popup Menu
File
Load Data & Setup
Save Data & Setup
Import Data
Export Data
New
Settings
Place mark here
Set memory size
Select arrow key function
Set view type to timing
Set view type to table
Set view type to binary
Show overview
Block
Move to block start
Move to block end
Move to next block
Move to previous block
Move to block(any)
Add block delimiter here
Delete current block delimiter
Rename current block
Resize current block
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć27
Basic Menu Operation
MENU Button
EDIT
Bottom Menu
Execute Action
Side Menu or Popup Menu
Set scope
Cut
Copy
Paste Ć insert
Paste Ć replace
Set data to high
Set data to low
Insert high data
Insert low data
Invert data
Mirror vertical
Mirror horizontal
Magnify
Numeric input
Shift left (add zero)
Shift right (add zero)
Shift left
Shift right
Rotate left
Rotate right
Binary up counter
Binary down counter
Johnson counter
Graycode counter
Enhanced Action
Clock Pattern
Shift Register Generator
Logical Operation
Bit Operation
Serial Code Converter
Make Sequence
Insert
Delete
Repeat Count
Set Enhanced Control
Special
Trig Wait
Event Jump
Jump to
Repeat
Delete All
Make Simple Sequence
Edit SubĆSequence
2Ć28
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Menu Operation
Setup Menu Tree
MENU button
Bottom menu
Side menu
SETUP
Group Assign
Add Group
Delete Group
Rename
Group Bit(s) Config
Reset All bits Assign
Output Condition
Assign Condition
Control Condition
Level/Delay
High
Low
Z on Stop
Timing Condition
Event Level
Event Enable/Disable
Inhibit Level
Change Inhibit Control
Rise
Fall
Delay
Run Mode
Repeat
Single
Step
Enhanced
Update
Trigger
Slope
Trigger Level
Impedance
Source
Interval
Clock
Source
State
Time
Int FREQ
Ext FREQ
PLL
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć29
Basic Menu Operation
Utility Menu Tree
MENU Button
UTILITY
Bottom Menu
Side Menu or Base Menu
Mass Memory
Change Directory
Make Directory
Rename
Copy or Delete
Copy
Delete
Delete All
Special
Initialize Media
Catalog Order
Lock
Cal
Execute
Display/Hardcopy
Display
Clock
Brightness
Dimmer
Hardcopy
Format
Port
Clear Message Area
System
Remote Port
GPIB
Configure
Address
Serial
Baudrate
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Handshake
Power up Pause
Date/Time
Reset to Factory
Security Immediate
DeĆskew
Reset Skew
Status
Diag
Type
Execute
2Ć30
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
This chapter describes DG2030 operating procedures from pattern signal creation
through output by presenting simple examples. Following these procedures is a
good way for new users to get an overview of the instrument’s operation. This
section presents the following four sample procedures.
1. Creating a Pattern and Storing into a File
2. Loading and Editing a Pattern Stored in a File
3. Setting up Signal Output
4. Creating a Sequence
Refer to the menu descriptions in the Reference section for detailed explanations
of the menus and functions used in these procedures.
NOTE. These examples do not cover all the features and functions of the
DG2030. They are intended only to introduce the operations required to execute
the instrument’s basic functions.
Required Equipment
The following equipment is required for examples 1 through 4.
H
An IBM-formatted floppy disk (2HD, 1.44 MB)
H
A digital storage oscilloscope (A Tektronix TDS-Series oscilloscope or
equivalent)
H
Two BNC cables
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć31
Operating Examples
Before Starting Examples
Be sure that the DG2030 is properly installed. Refer to Installation on page 1-6.
Turn the DG2030 on. Refer to Power On on page 1-9 for details on turning the
DG2030 on.
You do not need to connect the oscilloscope until Example 3.
Operating Procedure Sequences
Each operating procedure is presented in table format in order starting with step
1, and progresses through the end of the procedure. Tables such as the one shown
below list the steps for each procedure task. For these steps, press the buttons in
the order shown in the table, from left to right in each row, from top to bottom of
the table. If a number is shown in the front panel button column, enter that value
using the keypad. For popup menus, use the general purpose knob to select items
from the menu list. Operations such as operation 6 (below) do not involve
pressing the buttons shown in the row above, but rather are descriptions of
operations to be performed. Figure 2-21 shows the buttons used and the menu
layout.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front Panel
button
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Operation 5
Operation 6 (For example, set to xx with general purpose knob.)
Operation 7
Side Menu
General Purpose Knob
Front Panel Button
Bottom Menu
Bottom Button
Side Button
Menu Button
Figure 2Ć21: Operating buttons
2Ć32
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Example 1: Creating a Pattern and Storing into a File
Example 1 creates the output pattern for an 4-bit binary counter and stores that
pattern into a floppy disk.
Preparation for Pattern
Creation
Before creating new pattern data, initialize the instrument’s data and settings.
1. Clear the data group definitions and data memory.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Group Assign
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Reset All bits
Assign
OK
EDIT
File
New
OK
Environment Setup for
Pattern Creation
2. Set the pattern memory length to 1024 points.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Settings
Set memory
size
OK
1024 *
ENTER
OK
* Use the front panel keypad to enter numeric values.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć33
Operating Examples
3. Set the data bit positions and bit widths. Here we will set the height (scope)
and width of the data we are going to edit.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute
Action
Set scope
OK
4
OK
Front panel
button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once or twice.
0
ENTER
Move the knob icon to the Width window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once.
1024
ENTER
Press the down arrow button until the area cursor covers DATA0 to DATA3.
Pattern Creation
4. Create the binary pattern for a value being incremented every 4 clock ticks.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Execute
Action
Binary up
counter
OK
4
ENTER
OK
EXECUTE
This creates the binary pattern shown in Figure 2-22 in DATA0 to DATA3.
2Ć34
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć22: Binary pattern creation
Saving the Created Data
5. Save the created data on the floppy disk.
a. Insert a blank IBM-formatted floppy disk in the drive.
b. Name the new file COUNT1.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
File
Side button
Front panel
button
Save Data &
Setup
Clear String
COUNT1 *
OK
* Select each character in the file name using the generalĆpurpose knob and the
up and down arrow buttons. Press the EXECUTE button to insert the character
in the file name.
The data in this procedure is saved in the file COUNT1.PDA.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć35
Operating Examples
Example 2: Loading and Editing a Pattern Stored in a File
Example 2 loads a file from a floppy disk, and demonstrates pattern editing
using that data.
Before loading a file from the floppy disk, initialize the instrument’s data and
settings. This allows you to see the effect of loading the file you previously
saved in example 1.
1. Clear the data group and data definitions.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
SETUP
Group Assign
Popup Menu
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
Reset All bits
Assign
OK
EDIT
File
New
OK
Reading the File
2. Read in the file created in example 1 from the floppy disk.
a. Insert the floppy disk in the instrument’s floppy disk drive.
b. Execute the following actions.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
EDIT
File
Popup Menu
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
Load Data &
Setup
Select the file COUNT1.PDA from the file list using the generalĆpurpose knob.
OK
This loads the pattern created in example 1.
2Ć36
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Selecting Bits to Edit
3. Select DATA4 and DATA5 as the area to be edited.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
Side Button
Execute
Action
Set scope
OK
2
OK
Front Panel
Button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once or twice.
0
ENTER
Move the knob icon to the Width window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once.
1024
ENTER
Press the up and down arrow buttons until the area cursor covers DATA4 and DATA5.
Shifting Pattern
4. Do the following steps to shift the bits in DATA4 and DATA5 exactly one
sample width to the right.
Menu Button
Inserting a Glitch
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
Execute
Action
Shift right
(add zero)
OK
EXECUTE
5. DO the following steps to insert a glitch with a width of 1 sample in the
DATA5 bits.
a. Set DATA5 as the bits that will be the object of the edit.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
Side Button
Execute
Action
Set scope
OK
1
OK
Front Panel
Button
Set the block cursor to cover DATA5 using the up and down arrow buttons.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć37
Operating Examples
b. Set the glitch width to be 1.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
Move the knob icon to the Width window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once or twice.
1
ENTER
c. Select invert as the edit operation.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
Side Button
Execute
Action
Invert data
OK
Popup Menu
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
d. Insert two glitches.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Front Panel
Button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once.
32
ENTER
EXECUTE
96
ENTER
EXECUTE
This step inserted glitches at the points for cursor positions 32 and 96.
Figure 2-23 shows the pattern edited in example 2.
2Ć38
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć23: Pattern edited in example 2
Saving the Edited Data
6. Save the edited data on the floppy disk.
a. Insert a writable floppy disk in the drive.
b. Name the new file COUNT2.
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Popup Menu
File
Side Button
Front Panel
Button
Save Data &
Setup
Clear String
COUNT2
OK
The data in this procedure will be saved in the file COUNT2.PDA.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć39
Operating Examples
Example 3: Signal Output
Example 3 first groups the data bits from the pattern data created in example 2
and allocates each data bit to output channels. Next, this procedure sets all the
settings required for signal output and actually outputs the signals.
Grouping data bits
1. Assign DATA0 to DATA3 to a group called IC1.
a. Reset all bit allocations.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Group Assign
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Reset All bits
Assign
OK
b. Set the MSB (most significant bit) and LSB (least significant bit) to D3
and D0, respectively.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Select
4 DATA3
Group Bit(s)
Config
Front panel
button
MSB
(Set D3)
LSB
(Set D0)
OK
NOTE. The MSB setting may change depending on the direction the general
purpose knob is turned. If that happens, the MSB setting must be set again.
2Ć40
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
c. Attach the name IC1 to the newly created group.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Rename
Clear String
IC1
OK
2. Assign DATA4 to DATA7 to a group called IC2.
a. Set the MSB and LSB.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Select
0 DATA7
Group Bit(s)
Config
Front panel
button
MSB
(Set D7)
LSB
(Set D4)
OK
NOTE. The MSB setting may change depending on the direction the general
purpose knob is turned. If that happens, the MSB setting must be set again.
b. Attach the name IC2 to the group.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Rename
Clear String
IC2
OK
Then you can see a display as shown in 2-24.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć41
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć24: Group data
Allocating Data Bits to
Output Channels
3. Allocate data bits to output channels CH0 to CH7.
a. Clear the output channel for channels CH0 to CH7.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output
Condition
Side button
Front panel
button
Assign
Press the front panel up and down arrow buttons to select channel CH0 from the Output
assign list.
Release
Clear the CH1 and CH7 allocations in the same manner.
b. Turn off the output impedance control for each channel.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Control
Condition
Select CH0 from the list displayed in the screen using the knob on the front panel.
Change Inhibit
Control
Select OFF
2Ć42
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Using the same procedure to turn off the output impedance control for channels
CH1 to CH7.
OK
Go Back
c. Allocate the IC1 group data to the output channels CH0 to CH3. See
Figure 2-25.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Assign
Condition
Press the front panel up and down arrow buttons to select channel CH0 from the Output
assign list.
Select data D3 (IC1:3) from the Data bits list using the general purpose knob.
Assign
Allocate D2 to D0 to CH1 to CH3 using the same procedurel.
OK
d. Allocate the IC2 group data to the output channels CH4 to CH7 in the
same way as step c.
NOTE. Press the OK button when done to activate the allocations. Note that the
allocations will not become valid unless the OK button is pressed.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć43
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć25: Output assign list and channel assignment
To summarize data bits have been allocated, what we have done so far, to the
output channels as shown in Figure 2-26.
OutputĂassign
Data Bits
D3 to D0
Allocated
Data Bits
D7 to D4
Allocated
Channel
Name
Data
Inhibit
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
IC1:3
IC1:2
IC1:1
IC1:0
IC2:3
IC2:2
IC2:1
IC2:0
D3
D2
D1
D0
D7
D6
D5
D4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Group Name
Data Bit
Output Channels
Output Impedance Control. If the
data is not assigned, `- - -' is
displayed in this field.
Figure 2Ć26: Output channel data bit allocation
2Ć44
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Setting Sampling Clock
Frequency
4. Set the sampling clock frequency to 50 MHz.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Clock
Side button
Front panel
button
Source
(Select Int.)
Int FREQ
50
MHz
PLL
(Select On.)
Setting Signal Generation
Mode
5. Set the signal generation mode to continuous mode.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Run Mode
Setting Output Level
Side button
Front panel
button
Repeat
6. Set the channel CH0 to CH7 output levels to 3 V for the high level and –1 V
for the low level.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Level Condition
Select channel CH0 by pressing the front panel up and down arrow buttons.
High
3
ENTER
Low
-1
ENTER
Set the output levels for channels CH1 to CH7 in the same manner.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć45
Operating Examples
Setting Rise/Fall Timing
The rise time and fall time of each output signal can be varied within a certain
range.
7. Set the rise time for the output channel CH0 to CH3 to 5 ns and fall time for
those channels to FAST. See Figure 2-27.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Timing Condition
Select channel CH0 by pressing the front panel up and down arrow buttons.
Rise
5
ENTER
Fall
0
ENTER
Set the rise and fall times for channels CH1 to CH3 in the same manner.
Slopes for the rise and fall periods
can be set within the ranges
indicated by the nonĆhighlighted
lines. As a slope, FAST or a value
from the range can be selected.
Figure 2Ć27: Rise /fall time settings
2Ć46
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Setting Delay Timing
The delay time for each channel can be set.
8. Set the delays for the output channels CH4 to CH7 to 10 ns.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Select channel CH4 by pressing the front panel up and down arrow buttons.
Delay
10
ENTER
Set the delays for channels CH5 to CH7 in the same manner.
Delay Time Setting
Output Voltage Level Settings
Rise/Fall Time Settings
Figure 2Ć28: Output parameter settings
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć47
Operating Examples
Signal Output
This step actually outputs the signals and confirms those signals with an
oscilloscope.
9. Connect the outputs to the oscilloscope.
Connect the CH0 and CH1 on the front panel to the oscilloscope channels
CH1 and CH2. This requires two BNC to BNC cables as shown in Figure
2-29.
DG2030
Oscilloscope
Two BNC Cables
Figure 2Ć29: DG2030 and oscilloscope connection
10. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel.
11. Set up the oscilloscope appropriately and observe the pattern signals on the
oscilloscope screen.
Saving State of the
Settings
12. Save the state of the settings on the floppy disk.
a. Insert an IBM-formatted floppy disk in the drive.
b. Name the new file COUNT3.
Menu button
Bottom button
EDIT
File
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Save Data &
Setup
Clear String
COUNT3
OK
The data in this procedures will be saved in the file COUNT3.PDA.
2Ć48
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Example 4: Creating a Sequence
Example 4 creates four 128-bit blocks and assigns the blocks to sequences, as
shown in Figure 2-30.
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 1 iterated 10 times
Block 4 iterated 20 times
Defined in subsequence
SUB 1
Block 3
SUB 1 iterated 2 times
Block 3 iterated infinitely
Block 4
The sequence repeats Block 3
infinitely. When an event signal
is input, the sequence jumps to
Block 4.
Figure 2Ć30: Example 4 block sequence
First, create the following data patterns for the blocks.
H
Block 1: Binary up-counter pattern
H
Block 2: Data pattern consisting of all zeros
H
Block 3: Binary down-counter pattern
H
Block 4: Data pattern consisting of all ones
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć49
Operating Examples
Preparing to Create Data
1. Clear the data group definitions and pattern data.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Group Assign
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Reset All bits
Assign
OK
EDIT
File
New
OK
2. Set the length of pattern memory (the number of samples) to 512 points.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Settings
Set memory
size
OK
512
ENTER
OK
3. Set the block cursor position and width. This procedure sets a scope of 8
(DATA0 to DATA7) and a width of 128 samples.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute
Action
Set scope
OK
8
OK
Front panel
button
Move the knob icon to the Width window in the upper left of the screen using the front
panel CURSOR button.
128
ENTER
Creating 4 Blocks
2Ć50
4. Divide the data between block 1 (point 0 to 127) and block 2 (point 128 to
511). Use BK2 as the name for block 2.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button once or twice.
128
ENTER
Block
Add block
delimiter here
OK
Clear String
BK2
OK
Place a block delimiter here
(to separate the blocks)
Point No. 0
125
126
127
128
129
130
Block 1
511
Block 2
Current Edit Screen
Figure 2Ć31: Block separation
5. Divide the data from point 128 to point 255 between block 2 (128 to 255)
and block 3 (256 to 511). Use BK3 as the name for block 3. Confirm that the
knob icon appears in the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen. If
the icon is not in that window, move it there with the front panel CURSOR
button.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
256
ENTER
Block
Add block
delimiter here
OK
Clear String
BK3
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć51
Operating Examples
6. Divide the data from point 256 to point 383 between block 3 (256 to 383)
and block 4 (384 to 511). Use BK4 as the name for block 3. Confirm that the
knob icon appears in the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen. If
the icon is not in that window, move it there with the front panel CURSOR
button.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
384
ENTER
Block
Add block
delimiter here
OK
Clear String
BK4
OK
7. Change the name for block 1 to BK1. Confirm that the knob icon appears in
the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen. If the icon is not in that
window, move it there with the front panel CURSOR button.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
0
ENTER
Block
Rename
current block
OK
Clear String
BK1
Creating Block 1 Data
OK
8. Create a binary up-counter data in block 1. First make sure that the value of
the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen is 0. Set that value to 0 if it
is not already 0. Then perform the following operations.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Execute
Action
Binary up
counter
OK
1
ENTER
OK
2Ć52
EXECUTE
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć32: Creating a binary upĆcounter for block BK1
Block 2 Data
Creating Block 3 Data
The block 2 data is already all zeros. The data can be used as is without editing.
9. Create binary down-counter data in block 3. Confirm that the knob icon
appears in the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen. If the icon is
not in that window, move it there with the front panel CURSOR button.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
256
ENTER
Execute
Action
Binary down
counter
OK
1
ENTER
OK
EXECUTE
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć53
Operating Examples
Figure 2Ć33: Creating a binary downĆcounter for block BK3
Creating Block 4 Data
10. Create data consisting of all ones in block 4. Confirm that the knob icon
appears in the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen. If the icon is
not in that window, move it there with the front panel CURSOR button.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
384
ENTER
Execute
Action
2Ć54
Set data to
High
OK
EXECUTE
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Create a Subsequence
In the following example, create one subsequence as shown in Figure 2-34.
Figure 2Ć34: Sample subsequence
Following outputs are made when this subsequence is called from the sequence:
H
The pattern in BK1 is output 10 times.
H
The BK2 pattern is output once.
H
The BK3 pattern is output once
H
The BK4 pattern is output 20 times.
Next, create a sequence, as shown in Figure 2-35. In the sequence, block or
subsequence can be defined in each line. When the sequence is executed, the
lines defined with subsequence call those subsequences and execute them.
The BLOCK column of the lines defined with subsequences becomes highlight
gray to distinguish from those defined with blocks, as shown in Figure 2-35.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć55
Operating Examples
R
ON
ON
3
Figure 2Ć35: Sample sequence
The sequence is performed as follows:
H
Line 0: Wait trigger event and then call the subsequence.
H
Line 1: Wait trigger event and then call the subsequence.
H
Line 2: While waiting event signal, the BK1 pattern is repeatedly output.
When the event condition has been satisfied, the process jumps to the line 3.
H
Line 3: The BK4 pattern is output.
The following two steps create the subsequence.
11. Open the Make Sub-sequence popup menu.
Menu button
Bottom button
Make
Sequence
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Special
Edit SubĆ
Sequence
New
2Ć56
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
12. Create the lines in the popup menu and assign the name SUB1 to the
subsequence.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Insert
Select the BK1 from the Select block popup menu using the front panel knob.
OK
Repeat
10
ENTER
With the front panel down arrow button, advance the line pointer to the next line. See
Figure 2Ć36.
Using the same procedures as above, insert BK2, BK3 and BK4 into the line 1, 2 and 3,
respectively, and set the repeat count to 20 for the BK4.
OK
Clear String
SUB1
OK
Go Back
Go Back
Line Pointer
Figure 2Ć36: Line pointer
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć57
Operating Examples
Do the following three steps to create the sequence.
13. Create line 0 and line 1 in the sequence.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Insert
Select the SUB1 from the Select block and SubĆsequence popup menu using the front
panel knob.
OK
Set Enhanced
Control
Trig Wait
(Set to On)
Go Back
With the front panel down arrow button, advance the line pointer to the next line.
Using above procedures, insert SUB1 into the line 1 and set the Trig Wait.
14. Create line 2 and line 3. Note that you can not set the jump address (line
number) that has not been created. The jump condition is set in step
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Insert
Select the BK1 from the Select block and SubĆsequence popup menu using the front
panel knob.
OK
Set Enhanced
Control
Repeat Count
(Set to Infinite)
Go Back
With the front panel down arrow button, advance the line pointer to the next line.
Using above procedures, insert BK4 into the line 3.
2Ć58
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
15. Create line 3, and then terminate editing.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
With the front panel up arrow button, move the line pointer back to the line 2.
Set Enhanced
Control
Event Jump
(Set to On)
Jump to
3
ENTER
Go Back
The following two steps set the trigger and run mode for output.
16. Set the trigger source to external and trigger interval to off.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Source
(Set to Ext)
Interval
State
(Set to Off)
Go Back
17. Set the run mode to Enhanced.
Menu button
Bottom button
Run Mode
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Enhanced
Note that when the run mode is set to Enhanced, the displayed settings in the
ENHANCED columns of the Make Sequence menu become gray. See
Figure 2-37.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć59
Operating Examples
18. Output the sequence and observe the pattern using an oscilloscope. See
Figure 2-29 on page 2-48 for the connection between the DG2030 and the
oscilloscope.
Press START/STOP button on the front panel to start output. The message
Waiting for Trigger is displayed soon at upper right part of the screen.
The first two lines in the sequence wait for a trigger event. Press the
FORCE TRIGGER button on the front panel to generate the trigger event.
The sequence in line 2 outputs the BK1 pattern repeatedly until the event
condition is satisfied. Press the STEP/EVENT button on the front panel to
quit the loop and to advance to sequence line 3.
In Enhanced mode, the entire sequence is repeatedly output. So the message
Waiting for Trigger is displayed again and again until you press the
START/STOP button on the front pane.
Figure 2Ć37: Sample sequence
2Ć60
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Examples
Saving the Example
Sequence
19. Exit sequence creation mode and save the data in a file. Name the file SEQ1.
Menu button
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Insert a writable floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
File
Save Data &
Setup
Clear String
SEQ1
OK
This creates the file called SEQ1.PDA. If a file of the same name already
exists a message asking if that file should be overwritten will be displayed.
Press OK once more if that message is displayed.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2Ć61
Operating Examples
2Ć62
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Reference
This section provides the following information:
H
A detailed description of the Edit, Setup, and Utility menus.
H
Procedures for editing pattern data and creating sequences.
H
Procedures for defining groups, setting up channels, setting pod voltages,
operating modes, and triggers.
H
Procedures for setting and saving instrument settings.
NOTE. The current firmware version does not provide any functions under the
APPLICATION menu.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć1
Reference
Operation Outlines
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-1 show a typical example for operation flow from
creating and editing pattern data to outputing it.
Creating and editing pattern
data and/or sequence
Operations with the Edit menu
and front panel buttons and knob.
Setting output parameters,
run mode and trigger
Operations with the Setup menu
and front panel buttons and knob.
Outputing pattern data
Operations with the
START/STOP, STEP/EVENT
and FORCE TRIGGER buttons
on the front panel. Operations
may also be performed with
external signals coming from
remote controller or another
equipments.
Figure 3Ć1: Operation flow for pattern data output #1
Creating and editing pattern
data and/or sequence
Operations with the Edit menu
and front panel buttons and knob.
Setting output parameters,
run mode and trigger
Operations with the Setup menu
and front panel buttons and knob.
Created and edited pattern data
can be stored in a file together
with the setup information.
Outputing pattern data
As well as pattern data, the setup information is also
stored in the file. When you recall stored data from a
file, the DG2030 will also be set up. You can prepare
various data pattern to be used for inspecting
facilities and/or checking in production lines.
Pattern data acquired with logic analyzer or
oscilloscope can be imported to the DG2030. They
are also used as test patterns for circuit designs.
Operations with the
START/STOP, STEP/EVENT
and FORCE TRIGGER buttons
on the front panel. Operations
may also be performed with
external signals coming from
remote controller or another
equipments.
Figure 3Ć2: Operation flow for pattern data output #2
3Ć2
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Reference
Creating Pattern Data and Sequences
Data pattern can be created and edited with functions in the EDIT menu.
Pattern Data
Here is a basic operation flow for creating pattern data.
1. Set memory size with EDIT ! Settings ! Set memory size. The default
memory size is 1000 word.
2. Specify work area with EDIT ! Execute Action ! Set scope and Width
on the screen.
3. Create a pattern with the functions in EDIT ! Execute Action.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 until the pattern data that you want is created.
Sequence
Here is a basic operation flow for creating a sequence.
1. Create more than one block (pattern data delimited by block delimiter) on
the pattern memory as following steps:
a. Create the pattern data using the procedures described in Pattern Data
above.
b. Change the block name with EDIT ! Block ! Rename current
block.
c. Move the cursor to the data point next to the end of the pattern data by
changing the value in the Cursor on the screen.
d. Mark the block delimiter with EDIT ! Block ! Add block delimiter
here. This creates a new block. The block must have a unique name,
which you can enter at this time.
e. Create the next block pattern using the procedures described in Pattern
Data above.
f.
Repeat step c through e until all blocks you need are created.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć3
Reference
2. Create a sequence table as follows:
a. Open the sequence editor with EDIT ! Make Sequence.
b. If you need, create sub-sequence(s) with EDIT ! Make Sequence !
Special ! Edit Sub-Sequence ! New.
c. Compose the lines by inserting the blocks and/or sub-sequences with
EDIT ! Make Sequence ! Insert.
d. Define the control conditions in each line with EDIT ! Make
Sequence ! Repeat Count and/or the functions of EDIT ! Make
Sequence ! Set Enhanced Control.
Setups for Output
Once you have created pattern data or sequences, do the following steps to
configure the instrument hardware and set the output parameters:
1. Assign data bits (DATA0 to DATA7) to output channels (CH0 to CH7) with
SETUP ! Output Condition ! Assign Condition. By default, DATA0 to
DATA7 are assigned to CH0 to CH7, respectively.
2. Set the pulse high and low levels with SETUP ! Level Condition.
3. Set the edge slopes and delay with SETUP ! Timing Condition.
4. Set the output frequency with SETUP ! Clock.
Outputs
Output your pattern data using the following steps:
1. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to start signal output.
2. Press the START/STOP button again to stop output.
Advanced Control for Sequence
Using the event, trigger and run modes, you can control the pattern data output
timing and sequence from an external controller or just pressing the front panel
buttons. For advanced control, do the following steps:
1. Set the trigger wait and/or event jump into each line on the sequence with
the functions of EDIT ! Make Sequence ! Set Enhanced Control. See
Sequence described above.
2. Set the trigger parameters with SETUP ! Trigger.
3. Set the event and/or inhibit parameters with SETUP ! Output Condition
! Control Condition.
4. Set the run mode with SETUP ! Run Mode.
3Ć4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
The bottom menu for the EDIT menu includes the File, Settings, Block,
Execute Action, Enhanced Action, Make Sequence, and Undo items.
Table 3-1 lists the functions of the EDIT menu items and the pages where their
documentation appears.
Table 3Ć1: EDIT menu functions
Bottom
Base or side menu
Function
Page
File
Load Data & Setup
Loading pattern data and setup parameters
3Ć9
Save Data & Setup
Saving pattern data and setup parameters
3Ć9
Import Data
Loading pattern data from mass memory
3Ć10
Export Data
Writing pattern data to mass memory
3Ć16
New
Initialization for data creation
3Ć18
Place mark here
Setting the reference mark
3Ć19
Set memory size
Setting the memory size
3Ć20
Select arrow key function
Setting the operation of the arrow buttons
3Ć21
Set view type to timing
Setting the pattern data display format
3Ć23
Moving the cursor for the block
3Ć25
Add block delimiter here
Delimiting blocks
3Ć26
Delete current block delimiter
Combining blocks
3Ć27
Rename current block
Changing a block name
3Ć28
Resize current block
Changing the size of a block
3Ć28
Settings
Set view type to table
Set view type to binary
Show overview
Block
Move to block start
Move to block end
Move to next block
Move to previous block
Move to block( any)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć5
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć1: EDIT menu functions (Cont.)
Bottom
Base or side menu
Function
Page
Execute Action
Set scope
Setting the scope
3Ć31
Cut
Deleting pattern data
3Ć32
Copy
Copying pattern data
3Ć32
Paste Ć insert
Pasting (inserting) pattern data
3Ć32
Paste Ć replace
Pasting (replacing) pattern data
3Ć33
Set data to high
Setting pattern data to high
3Ć33
Set data to low
Setting pattern data to low
3Ć33
Insert high data
Inserting high data
3Ć34
Insert low data
Inserting low data
3Ć34
Invert data
Inverting data
3Ć34
Mirror vertical
Swapping pattern data in the vertical direction
3Ć35
Mirror horizontal
Swapping pattern data in the horizontal direction
3Ć36
Magnify
Magnifying pattern data
3Ć36
Numeric input
Inputting pattern data numerically
3Ć36
Shift left (add zero) or
Shift right (add zero)
Shifting pattern data left or right by inserting zeros
3Ć38
Shift left or Shift right
Shifting pattern data left or right
3Ć38
Shift up (add zero) or
Shift down (add zero)
Shifting pattern data up or down by inserting zeros
3Ć38
Shift up or Shift down
Shifting pattern data left or right
3Ć38
Rotate left or Rotate right
Rotating pattern data left or right
3Ć40
Rotate left or Rotate right
Rotating pattern data up or down
Binary up counter
Creating standard pattern data
3Ć41
Clock Pattern
Clock pattern generation
3Ć43
Shift Register Generator
Pseudorandom pulse generation
3Ć45
Logical Operation
Logical operations between pattern data items
3Ć48
Bit Operation
Moving or copying pattern data
3Ć50
Serial Code Converter
Serial code data conversion
3Ć51
Binary down counter
Johnson counter
Graycode counter
Enhanced Action
3Ć6
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć1: EDIT menu functions (Cont.)
Bottom
Base or side menu
Function
Page
Make Sequence
Insert
Sequence definition
3Ć56
Delete
3Ć57
Repeat Count
3Ć57
Set Enhanced Control
3Ć57
Special
3Ć58
Undo
Cancel the latest operation and restore the previous
setting
3Ć61
Edit Display
This section describes the EDIT menu screen shown in Figure 3-3. Table 3-2
provides a description and page number references.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10
11
19
12
18
13
17
16
15
14
Figure 3Ć3: EDIT menu (timing display)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć7
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć2: Edit menu display
Screen
Reference
3Ć8
Function
Page
1
Displays the point position of the cursor pointer, and the time
from the start of the data. When the knob icon is displayed at
the left edge, the cursor can be moved with the general
purpose knob.
2
The block name. Also the adjacent area is used to display the
position of the current block with respect to the total number of
blocks. There is only one block in the example shown in the
figure, and currently the block UNNAMED is being displayed.
3
Displays a M to mark the position of the reference.
4
The cursor
5
Displays the memory size of the block at the cursor position.
6
Displays the difference between the reference mark (3) and the
cursor as a number of points and also as a time.
7
Displays the position of the reference mark (3) as a point value
and as a time.
8
The area cursor. The area enclosed by this cursor is the object
of the execute action editing operations. The area is set by the
Set scope (vertical) in the Execute Action menu and Width
(horizontal) items.
9
Displays the time per point.
10
Displays the total memory size for all blocks.
11
Displays the size of the remaining available memory.
12
A scale which shows point positions.
13
Display area for the pattern data.
14
Describes the current action of the arrow buttons.
15
Displays the value of the data at the cursor position (4).
16
Displays the number of bits in the data bit group.
17
Describes the function of the front panel EXECUTE button.
Pressing the EXECUTE button executes the editing function for
the indicated cursor position or area.
18
Indicates the data bits or the data bit groups. Data bits that are
set up to be the object of editing operations are displayed at a
higher intensity (bright).
19
Displays the width of the area cursor as a number of points and
as a time.
3Ć19
3Ć20
3Ć21
3Ć29
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
File Menu
The File menu saves and loads data between the instrument’s internal memory
and mass memory (floppy disks). When the File bottom menu item is selected, a
side menu with Load Data & Setup, Save Data & Setup, Import, Export, and
New items is displayed.
Load Data & Setup
Reads format pattern data, block, group, sequence and setup data into the
instrument’s internal memory from mass memory (floppy disk).
The DG2030 can read data created and stored from the DG2020. The DG2030
will use the pattern data in the lower 8 bits. Also, the DG2030 can read DG2020
setup information except for those settings that are not common to both
platforms.
Sub menu
Item
Function
Change Directory
Changes the current directory.
Operation. Load the pattern data and setup parameters.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
File
Load Data & Setup
Select the file to be loaded.
Save Data & Setup
OK
Stores the pattern data, block, group, sequence and setup data from the instrument’s internal memory to mass memory (floppy disk) in DG2030 format.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Clear String
Deletes the current displayed string.
Change Directory
Changes the current directory.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć9
Edit Menu
Operation. Save the pattern data and setup parameters
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Insert a writeĆenabled floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
File
Save Data & Setup
Enter the file name for the data to be saved.
Import
OK
Loads pattern data from mass memory (floppy disk) into pattern memory.
The DG2030 can read the following data formats:
H
Tektronix TDS series waveform data (file extension: .WFM)
H
Tektronix TLS series group data (file extension: .GRP)
H
Tektronix AWG2000 series waveform data (file extension: .WFM)
H
Tektronix DG2020 and DG2030 waveform data (file extension: .PDA)
H
CSV format data (file extension: .CSV). A procedure for formatting data in a
CSV format is on page 3-14.
Popup menu parameter settings are used to specify the read-in method.
Operation. Import pattern data from mass memory.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Insert the floppy disk in the drive.
File
Import Data
Select the file to be read in.
OK
Change the parameters as required.
OK
Popup Menu. Figure 3-4 shows the data read-in configuration window. The
parameters that appear in this window differ depending on the data format being
read in.
3Ć10
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Figure 3Ć4: Import Configuration Menu (File format: AWG2000 series waveform file)
Table 3-3 describes the input parameters.
Table 3Ć3: Import parameters
Parameter
Function
Destination
Sets the place where the readĆin data is to be written. Either Pattern
memory or the Paste buffer can be selected. If data is read into the
paste buffer, data can be pasted to the data bit specified by the Paste
item in the Execute Action menu.
Read Point(s)
Sets the number of data points to be read. Data in excess of the
specified memory size cannot be read in.
Source Start
Specifies the starting position from which the data is read in from the
file.
Source MSB
Specifies the position of the MSB from which data in the file will be
read.
Dest Start
Specifies the position which data is read in when pattern memory is the
destination.
Dest MSB
Specifies the position of the MSB to which data will be written when
pattern memory is the destination.
Read type
Sets the data readĆin method when pattern memory is the destination.
Either Insert or Overwrite can be selected.
Convert to Bin
When this setting is set to ON, the waveform is compared to a
threshold level and the data is converted to binary. RP binary data from
the Tektronix TDS and TLS series products are read in as RI data. The
data cannot be converted to binary data if it is left in the RP state.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć11
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć3: Import parameters (Cont.)
Parameter
Function
Threshold
Sets the threshold level used to convert readĆin data to binary when the
Convert to Bin parameter is set to ON.
With Marker Data
Sets whether or not marker data is read, in addition to waveform data,
for Tektronix AWG2000 series waveform file format data.
Figures 3-5 and 3-6 show the data write operations in terms of point positions
and data bit positions when pattern memory is the write destination.
Start Position Number of data points read
(Read Points)
(Source Start)
ReadĆin Data
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ReadĆin Method
(Read type:Overwrite)
Pattern Memory
Initial position where data is written
(Dest Start)
Figure 3Ć5: Data write in terms of point positions
3Ć12
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
WithĂMarkerĂData:ĂON
ReadĆin Data
(AWG2000 Series
Waveform Data)
Pattern Memory
Mk1
7
Data Read MSB Setting
(Source MSB)
D11
Mk2
6
5
D10
4
D5
3
2
1
D4
D3
D4
D3
0
Data Write MSB Setting
(Dest MSB)
WithĂMarkerĂData:ĂOFF
ReadĆin Data
(AWG2000 Series
Waveform Data)
Pattern Memory
Mk1
7
Data Read MSB Setting
(Source MSB)
Mk2
6
D11
5
D10
4
D5
3
2
1
0
Data Write MSB Setting
(Dest MSB)
Figure 3Ć6: Data write in terms of data bit positions
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć13
Edit Menu
CSV Data Format
The DG2030 can import vector data from the built-in floppy drive using a simple
ASCII Comma Separated Variable (CSV) format. This section defines how the
data is formatted for importing into the DG2030. The CSV format is defined as
follows:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
<1DB0><Comma><1DB1><Comma>.....<1DBx><CR>
!
The number of bits defines (x)
defines the width of the pattern
<2DB0><Comma><2DB1><Comma>.....<2DBx><CR>
!
...
...
...
...
...
...
Second word
...
<yDB0><Comma><yDB1><Comma>.....<yDBx><CR>
!
The number of lines (y) defines
the depth of the pattern
When formatting data in the CSV format, note the following:
H
Each data byte is defined by the ASCII character: zero <0>, ASCII 48 or one
<1>, ASCII 49
H
Each data byte is separated by the ASCII character: comma <,> (ASCII 44),
space (ASCII 32), or TAB (ASCII 9)
H
Each line is terminated with the ASCII character: carriage return <CR>,
ASCII 13
H
The number of bits in a line defines the word width. For example, if the first
line consists of pattern: 1,0,1,1 then the word width is 4 bits wide
H
The number of lines in the file defines the number of words in the pattern.
For example, 10 lines defines 10 data words.
H
The DG2030 CSV format file is a DOS compatible file formatted as defined
above with a .CSV file extension.
CSV Format Example. To export a 8-bit pattern that is 3 words long, create the
following data, as an example, and save it using filename: PATTERN.CSV. This
can be created using a spreadsheet program, a text editor, or a custom filter
program to convert data from one format to another.
1,0,1,0,1,0,0,1<CR>
1,0,0,0,1,1,0,1<CR>
0,0,1,0,1,0,1,1<CR>
NOTE. Bit pattern data must have at least 90 words. Above pattern data can not
be read into the DG2030. Note that this is a simple example.
3Ć14
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Once the data words have been imported, parameters including clock rate, output
levels and inter-channel timing need to be set since the CSV format does not
transfer this information. After all operating parameters have been set, the entire
pattern can be stored on a floppy for non-volatile storage. The entire pattern will
fit on one floppy since the DG2030 uses an instrument specific binary format
that is more compact than ASCII format.
Importing Large Data Files. It may be possible to create a large CSV file.
Depending on what kind of operation is currently performed, the DG2030 may
not allocate the internal work space for creating CSV format data larger than
32768 words. An extreme example is a 8-bit wide word pattern that has 262144
(256 k) words. In this example, the export file would be over 4 megabytes long.
For the data to fit to work space and onto a floppy disk capacity, the pattern must
be segmented into 32 k (32768 words) blocks and saved to separate floppy disks.
To import the data do the following:
1. Insert the floppy with the first 32 k words into the drive.
2. Select File ! Import Data and select a file to be imported.
3. Press the OK button. The Import Configuration popup menu appears. This
menu allows you to configure how the data will be imported. In this
example, only the Dest Start point will be modified.
4. Set the Dest Start point to zero for the first floppy disk.
5. Set the Dest Start point to 32768 for the second floppy disk.
6. Set the Dest Start point to 65536 for the third floppy disk.
7. Repeat above step as incrementing the Dest Start point by 32768 until the
data from the last floppy disk is read.
Once the data words have been imported, parameters including clock rate, output
levels and inter-channel timing need to be set since the CSV format does not
transfer this information. After all operating parameters have been set, the entire
pattern can be stored on a floppy for non-volatile storage. The entire pattern will
fit on one floppy since the DG2030 uses an instrument specific binary format
that is more compact than ASCII format.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć15
Edit Menu
Export
Writes pattern data to mass memory (floppy disk). Data is written either as CSV
data or as Tektronix AWG2000 Series waveform data. The write method is
specified by setting a parameter in a popup menu.
NOTE. Icon data and hardware setup data are not saved in the output AWG2000
Series waveform data. When this data is read in to an AWG2000 Series
instrument, default setup data will be added. PCs and some other systems may
not be able to read this data directly.
Operation. Write pattern data to mass memory.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Insert a writeĆenabled floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
File
Export Data
Select the format of the data to be written
(either CSV data or AWG2000s Waveform
data).
OK
Enter the file name for the data to be written.
OK
Change the parameters as required.
OK
Popup Menu. Figure 3-7 shows the configuration windows for the two formats.
Pattern data will be written for
bits for which this indicator is on.
CSV Format
AWG2000 Series Format
Figure 3Ć7: The Export Config menu
3Ć16
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
When CSV format is selected, the instrument displays a menu for selecting
which bits should be written to the file, delimiter symbols, and other parameters.
Table 3-4 describes the parameter items that are set using this menu.
Table 3Ć4: Export parameters
Parameter
Function
Export Data Bit
Specifies the data bits to be written to the pattern data. Bits for which
this indicator is on are written. Bits can be selected using the general
purpose knob, and the on/off state can be changed with the left and right
arrow buttons. Consecutive bits can be turned on or off using the 1 and
0 numeric keys.
Column separator
Sets the line separator symbol. The delimiter symbols are usually used
as follows:
CR+LF: MSĆDOS and Windows
LF: UNIX
CR: Macintosh
Data separator
Sets the interĆbit delimiter. Comma, space, or tab can be selected for
this parameter. Comma is the most common setting.
From
This field is valid when Entered is specified for the Region in the sub
menu. It specifies the starting position for the data written.
Size
This field is valid when Entered is specified for the Region in the sub
menu. It specifies the number of data points written.
When the AWG2000 Series format is selected, a menu that allocates data for a
total of 14 bits, MARKER 1 and 2 and DATA00 to DATA11, is displayed. Use
the arrow buttons to select the AWG2000 Series bit and use the general purpose
knob to allocate the DG2030 bit. Allocate all bits to be written by repeating this
operation.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Set All Data bits
(CSV only)
Sets the data bit write settings for all data bits.
Clear All Data bits
(CSV only)
Clears the data bit write settings for all data bits.
Region
When this setting is set to All, the whole data area is written, and when
it is set to Entered, the data in the area specified by From and Size is
written.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć17
Edit Menu
Exporting Large Data. The DG2030 internal memory capacity can not export an
8-bit wide pattern data in CSV format that is larger than 32768 (32 k) words. For
the data to write into a floppy disk, the pattern must be segmented into 32 k
(32768 words) blocks and saved to separate floppy disks.
To import large data files, do the following:
1. Insert a first floppy disk into the drive.
2. Select the File ! Export Data to display Export Data Format popup menu.
3. Select CSV data and then press OK side button.
4. Enter a file name and then press the OK button. The Export Config (CSV)
popup menu appears. This menu allows you to configure how the data will
be exported. In this example, only the Size and From will be modified.
5. Confirm that the Region is set to Entered. If not, press the Region side
button to set to Entered.
6. Enter 0 into the From and 32768 into the Size, and then press OK side
button.
7. Repeat the procedures from step 2 to step 6 as changing the file name and
incrementing From point by 32768 until all pattern data are stored into
floppy disks. Note that two blocks of 32 K word pattern data in the CSV
format can be stored in a 3.5-inch 2HD floppy disk.
New
Initializes all data, including the pattern data, the block divisions, and the
sequence data to the default state.
Operation. Initialization for pattern data creation.
Bottom button
File
Popup menu
Side button
New
OK
3Ć18
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Settings Menu
The settings menu sets all the EDIT menu internal settings. It supports the
following operations.
H
Setting the reference mark
H
Setting the reference group
H
Setting the memory size
H
Setting the arrow button operating mode
H
Setting the display type (format)
The item to be set is selected from the popup list using the general purpose knob.
Figure 3-8 shows the popup menu.
Figure 3Ć8: Settings popup menu
Place Mark Here
Sets the reference mark at the current cursor position. The reference mark is
displayed as an “M” on the point scale as shown in Figure 3-9. The interval (D)
between the set reference mark and the current cursor position is displayed as a
point difference and as a time difference.
The reference mark only specifies the origin of the delta display. It does not
affect the pattern data definition itself.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć19
Edit Menu
Reference Mark
Number of points and time
between the reference
mark and the cursor
Reference Mark
Point Value and Time
D
Cursor
Figure 3Ć9: Reference mark M" display
Operation. Set the reference mark
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen using the up and down
arrow buttons.
Set the cursor to the reference point using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys.
Settings
Select Memory Size
Place mark here
OK
Sets the pattern data memory size. The size can be set to a value in the range
from 90 words to 262144 words. In some cases the memory size setting is
changed by operations that change the block length. Items that exceed the
memory size due to editing operations are either ignored or discarded.
Operation. Set the memory size
3Ć20
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Settings
Set memory size
OK
Set the number of points.
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Select Arrow Key
Function
Defines the actions of the arrow buttons. The term arrow button, refers to the left
and right arrow buttons for timing display, and the up and down arrow buttons
for table and binary display. Arrow button actions include those associated with
cursor movement and those associated with editing operations. Also note that the
arrow button action is sometimes changed automatically by the Execute Action
menu functions described on page 3-29. Figure 3-10 shows an action display
within the timing display
Arrow Button Action
Figure 3Ć10: Arrow button action display (timing display)
Operation. Set the arrow button action
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Settings
Select arrow key function
OK
Select the arrow button action.
OK
Popup Menu. Use the general purpose knob to select one of the following actions
from the displayed popup menu. Items that currently cannot be used are dimmed
as shown in Figure 3-11.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć21
Edit Menu
Figure 3Ć11: The Arrow button menu
Table 3Ć5: Arrow button functions
Arrow button
functionality
Cursor
movement
Cursor moveĆ
ment associated
with editing opĆ
erations
3Ć22
Selection item
Description
Move cursor to prev/next index
Moves the cursor to the immediately preceding or immediately
following data point.
Move cursor to prev/next block
Moves the cursor to the start of the block immediately preceding
or immediately following the block where the cursor is currently
located.
Move cursor to prev/next edge in selected
group
Moves the cursor to the next place in the currently selected group
where the data value changes. This function cannot be used if
multiple groups are selected.
Shift region left/right (add zero)
(Timing display only)
Shift region up/down (add zero)
(Table and binary display only)
The data in the edit area is shifted left (or up) or right (or down)
one point at a time. See the descriptions of the Execute Action
menu for the Shift region left/right (add zero) and Shift region
up/down (add zero) items.
Shift region left/right (Timing display only)
Shift region up/down (Table and binary display
only)
Except for the data point at the end of the editing area, the data in
the editing area is shifted left (or up) or right (or down) by 1 point
at a time. See the descriptions of the Execute Action menu for the
Shift region left/right and Shift region up/down items.
Rotate region left/right (Timing display only)
Rotate region up/down (Table and binary
display only)
The data in the editing area is rotated left (or up) or right (or down)
by 1 point at a time. See the descriptions of the Execute Action
menu for the Rotate region left/right and Rotate region up/down
items.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Setting Pattern Data
Display Format
Sets the pattern data display format. The display format is selected from the
following options.
H
Timing display
H
Table display
H
Binary display
H
Overview display
Table 3-6 presents descriptions and examples of the pattern data display formats.
Operation. Set the pattern data display format
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Settings
Select from the following items.
Set view type to timing
Set view type to table
Set view type to binary
Show overview
OK
Table 3Ć6: Pattern data display format
Display format menu item
Description
Set view type to timing
Sets the pattern data display method to the timing format.
Hexadecimal editing is possible if groups are defined.
Set view type to table
Sets the pattern data display method to the table format.
Hexadecimal editing is possible if groups are defined.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć23
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć6: Pattern data display format (Cont.)
3Ć24
Display format menu item
Description
Set view type to binary
Sets the pattern data display method to the binary format.
Show overview
Displays the whole pattern data on allocated memory
area. Editing can not be performed in this mode.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Block Menu
The block menu is used to define packets of data called blocks and the cursor
movement with respect to those blocks. The items to be set are selected from a
popup list using the general purpose knob.
Figure 3Ć12: Block popup menu
Block Relative Cursor Movement. Moves the cursor relative to the current block.
Table 3-7 provides a description for each item in the Block popup menu.
Table 3Ć7: Block relative cursor movement
Select item
Description
Move to block start
Moves the cursor to the start of the block in which the cursor is
currently located.
Move to block end
Moves the cursor to the end of the block in which the cursor is
currently located.
Move to next block
Moves the cursor to the start of the block following the block in
which the cursor is currently located.
Move to previous block
Moves the cursor to the start of the block preceding the block in
which the cursor is currently located.
Move to block (any)
Moves the cursor to the start of a block selected from a list of
blocks in a popup menu.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć25
Edit Menu
Current Cursor Position
MoveĂtoĂBlockĂEnd
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block n
MoveĂtoĂNextĂBlock
MoveĂtoĂPrevious Block MoveĂtoĂBlockĂStart
MoveĂtoĂBlockĂ(Any)
Figure 3Ć13: Block relative cursor movement
Operation. Block Relative Cursor Movement
Add Block Delimiter Here
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Block
Select from the following items.
Move to block start
Move to block end
Move to next block
Move to previous block
Move to block (any)
OK
Select the block to move to.
(Move to block (any) only)
OK
Sets a block delimiter at the current cursor position. The delimiter point becomes
the starting point of the new block. The block delimiter is marked on the point
scale.
NOTE. A block delimiter cannot be set at a point that is not at least 90 points
away from both the start and the end of the block in which the delimiter is being
set.
Current Cursor Position
Before
Division
90 Points or Over
90 Points or Over
After
Division
Block 1
Block 2
Block 1
Block 3
Block 3
Set a Block Delimiter
Figure 3Ć14: Dividing a block
3Ć26
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Operation. Divide a block
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen.
Move the cursor to the location where the block delimiter is to be placed.
Block
Select Add block delimiter here.
OK
Clear String
Input a block name.
Delete Current Block
Delimiter
OK
Deletes the block delimiter between the current block and the preceding block to
combine the block with the immediately preceding block.
NOTE. To delete the block delimiter, at least one block must exist before the
current block.
Current Cursor Position
Before
Combination
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Delete a Block Delimiter
After
Combination
Block 1
Block 3
Figure 3Ć15: Combine blocks
Operation. Combine blocks
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen.
Move the cursor to the block whose block delimiter is to be deleted.
Block
Select Delete current block delimiter.
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć27
Edit Menu
Rename Current Block
Changes the name of the block at the current cursor position.
Operation. Change a block name
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen.
Move the cursor to the block whose name is to be changed.
Block
Select Rename current block.
OK
Clear String
Enter the new block name.
Resize Current Block
OK
Changes the size of the block at the current cursor position. The size of other
blocks is not changed; the memory size is changed.
When increasing the size of the current block, only set a size that does not cause
the total number of points to exceed the maximum memory size. Zero data
corresponding to the increase in size is added at the end of the block.
When decreasing the size of the current block, data is deleted from the end of the
block.
Note that the range of allowable block sizes starts at a minimum size of
90 points.
NOTE. Changing the block size cannot be reversed with the Undo operation.
Current Cursor Position
Before Change a
Block Size
Block 1
After Change a
Block Size
Block 1
Block 2
Block 2
Block 3
Block 3
90 Points or Over
Figure 3Ć16: Change a block size
3Ć28
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Operation. Change a block size
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Move the knob icon to the Cursor window in the upper left of the screen.
Move the cursor to the block whose size is to be changed.
Block
Select Resize current block.
OK
Enter the new block size.
OK
Execute Action Menu
The Execute Action menu sets up a variety of editing operations. The editing
operation is selected from the Action Menu (a popup menu, see Figure 3-17)
using the general purpose knob. The editing operation is applied to the editing
object area when the front panel EXECUTE button is pressed.
Figure 3Ć17: Action popup menu
The area of the pattern data that will be the object of the edit may consist of the
range enclosed by the area cursor, and may consist of the area following the
cursor, depending on the selected editing operation.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć29
Edit Menu
Cursor Value
Point Cursor
Editing Area Cursor
Knob Icon
Scope
Width Value
Figure 3Ć18: Edit area
The location or range that the editing operation applies to is set as follows:
H
Point Position Input. The range is determined by the Width value. To set the
width value, move the knob icon to the Width value display by pressing the
front panel CURSOR button. Then enter the value with the general purpose
knob or the numeric keys.
To set the position move the knob icon next to the Cursor position display
by pressing the front panel CURSOR button. Then enter the value with the
general purpose knob or the numeric keys.
H
3Ć30
Group/bit Input. The groups or bits to be included in the range are set using
the Execute Action → Set scope item.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute Action
Select Set scope.
OK
Determine the scope.
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
When changing the groups or bits in the editing range, the buttons used will
differ depending on the display format. Use the up and down arrow buttons
for timing display format, and use the left and right arrow buttons for table
and binary display formats.
H
Editing Operation. Use the following editing procedure when the area
enclosed by the editing area cursor is the object of the editing operation.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute Action
Select the editing operation.
OK
Set the value of the Cursor item at the upper left of the screen.
Set the value of the Width item at the upper left of the screen.
Set the groups/bit.
EXECUTE
Use the following editing procedure when the area following the cursor is
the object of the editing operation.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute Action
Select the editing operation.
OK
Determine the value of the Cursor item at the upper left of the screen.
Determine the group/bit.
EXECUTE
NOTE. Pressing the CLEAR MENU button clears the selected editing operation.
Set Scope
Sets the range of groups or bits that will be the object of an editing operation
executed by the EXECUTE button.
The meaning of a scope element differs depending on the pattern data display
format. For the timing and table display format, a element group is a single
scope element. For the binary display format a single bit is a single scope
element. Therefore in timing and table display, the number of bits that will be
edited may change depending on which groups are within the selected range,
even though the scope does not change as it is moved.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć31
Edit Menu
Operation. Set the scope
Cut
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Execute Action
Select Set scope.
OK
Set the number of scope elements using the
knob.
OK
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data in the editing range is deleted, and
data is filled in at the end of memory in an amount equal to the amount of data
deleted. The filled data (the tail) is set to 0. Note that the deleted data is inserted
in the paste buffer and can be used as paste data.
Area Cursor
Tail
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Figure 3Ć19: Cut
Copy
PasteĆinsert
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data in the editing range is copied to the
paste buffer. The pattern data itself is not affected.
Inserts the data in the paste buffer at the current cursor position. The data after
the cursor is moved to the rear by the length of the pasted data. After the data is
moved, data that exceeds the set memory size is lost.
Cursor
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Paste Buffer Data
Figure 3Ć20: Paste - insert
3Ć32
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
PasteĆreplace
Writes the data in the paste buffer over the data starting at the current cursor
position.
Cursor
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Paste Buffer Data
Figure 3Ć21: Paste - replace
Set Data To High
The cursor becomes the area cursor. All the data bits in the editing area are set to 1.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć22: Set data to high
For example, this operation will set the value of a 3-bit group data item to 7H
(hexadecimal).
Set Data To Low
The cursor becomes the area cursor. All the data bits in the editing area are set
to 0.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć23: Set data to low
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć33
Edit Menu
Insert High Data
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data following the cursor is moved to
the rear by the amount specified for the editing area and the data in the editing
area is set to 1.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć24: Insert high data
Insert Low Data
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data following the cursor is moved to
the rear by the amount specified for the editing area and the data in the editing
area is set to 0.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć25: Insert low data
Invert Data
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data in the editing area is inverted, i.e. 0
becomes 1, and 1 becomes 0.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć26: Invert data
3Ć34
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
For example, this operation will set the value of a 3-bit group whose original
value was 4H (hexadecimal) to 3H.
Original data: 100 (binary) (= 4H)
Inverted data: 011 (binary) (= 3H)
Mirror Vertical
The function described here is for timing display format. The cursor becomes the
area cursor. The area specified as the editing area is reordered in the group/bit
direction in a mirror-image manner. This editing operation operates on bit units
regardless of any group definitions. In display formats other than timing display
(i.e., table and binary), the reordering is performed in the point direction.
Before Execution
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
Editing Area
After Execution
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć27: Mirror vertical
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć35
Edit Menu
Mirror Horizontal
This function is for timing display format. The cursor becomes the area cursor.
The area specified as the editing area is reordered in the point direction in a
mirror-image manner. In display formats other than timing display (i.e., table and
binary), the reordering is performed in the group/bit direction.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć28: Mirror horizontal
Magnify
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data in the area specified as the editing
area is magnified in the direction of the time axis. This function has one
parameter, the magnification factor (Mag Factor). This can be set to any integer
from 2 to 100.
For example, if Mag Factor is 2, then magnifying a data range with the data
0101 would give the data 00110011. This editing operation repeats each data
item the number of times specified by the Mag Factor parameter.
The data following the edit area is moved to the rear from the editing area by the
amount of the data increased due to the magnification. The data in the tail that
exceeds the memory size is lost.
Before
Execution
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć29: Magnify
Numeric Input
The cursor switches to the point cursor, and the input position is indicated on the
display. Data can then be changed by input of numeric values. As data is input,
existing data at the input position is overwritten.
After selecting Numeric input from the Action Menu, step is set using the
Points/Step popup window. A ’step’ is the number of points that are set for each
number that is input.
3Ć36
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Then, the EXECUTE button is pressed to start input. Front panel keys are then
pressed to set the required data values. The kind of input that is possible differs
according to the display format, as shown in Table 3-8.
Table 3Ć8: Numeric input differences
Display Method
Input Position
Numeric Input
Type
Timing
Display of that group data value is selected.
Hexadecimal
Table
Data at the object position is displayed highlighted
(bright).
Hexadecimal
Binary
Data at the object position is displayed highlighted
(bright).
Binary
Note that depending on how many bits there are in the group at which the input
is currently directed, it is sometimes not possible to input the full range of
hexadecimal digits. For instance, if the group is only three bits wide, it is not
possible to input a digit larger than 7.
Input of each data value finishes, and the data is set, when the number of input
digits is sufficient to set all the bits in the group. There is no need to press the
enter button.
When the scope is only one group deep (or one bit deep for binary format), the
cursor moves along the data by the number of points in a step for each input
operation. The next input operation will then set the data at the new cursor
position for the same group.
However, when the scope is more than one group deep (or more than one bit
deep for binary format), the cursor does not immediately move. Instead, the next
input action will be directed at the next group down (or to the right). Only when
input to the last group in the scope is complete does the cursor move along the
data.
Operation. Actions for performing numeric input
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Executed Action
Numeric input
OK
Front Panel button
Set the Points/Step using the general purpose knob.
OK
EXECUTE
Input data using numeric keys.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć37
Edit Menu
Shifting
The DG2030 provides several methods for the shifting of data in timing, table, or
binary display.
Timing. In timing display you can shift data using any one of the following:
H
Shift left (add zero)
H
Shift right (add zero)
H
Shift left
H
Shift right
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data inside the editing area is shifted
one point to the left or right. Data that overflows the edit area is lost. If you
select any one of the add zero selections, zeros are added at the right or left. If
you select shifting without adding zeros, values added at the right or left are
equal to the right or left-most values for each bit in the edit area when shifting
started.
Figures 3-30, 3-31, 3-32, and 3-33 illustrate the different shifting selections for
timing.
Before
Execution
Data 0 Added
Moved Left by 1 Point
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć30: Shift left (add zero)
Before
Execution
Data 0 Added
Moved Right by 1 Point
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć31: Shift right (add zero)
3Ć38
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Before
Execution
Moved Left by 1 Point
After
Execution
Hold the Level of
the Right Edge
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć32: Shift left
Before
Execution
Hold the Level of the Left Edge
Moved Right by 1 Point
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć33: Shift right
If a shifting operation is selected when the Select arrow key function item is
selected in the Settings menu, data can be shifted to the left or right with the
arrow buttons.
Table and Binary. In the table and binary displays you can shift data using any of
the following:
H
Shift up (add zero)
H
Shift down (add zero)
H
Shift up
H
Shift down
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data inside the editing area is shifted
one point up or down. Data that overflows the edit area is lost. If you select any
one of the add zero selections, zeros are added to the top or bottom. If you select
shifting without adding zeros, values added at the top or bottom are equal to the
top or bottom-most values for each bit in the edit area when shifting started.
If a shifting operation is selected when the Select arrow key function item is
selected in the Settings menu, data can be shifted up or down with the arrow
buttons.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć39
Edit Menu
Rotating
The DG2030 provides several methods for rotating data in timing, hexadecimal,
or binary display.
Timing. In timing display you can rotate data using any one of the following:
H
Rotate left
H
Rotate right
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data inside the editing area is rotated
one point to the left or right. Data that overflows the editing area cycles around
and is added at the left or right of the edit area. Figures 3-34 and 3-35 illustrate
the different rotating selections for timing.
Before
Execution
Rotate Left by 1 Point
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć34: Rotate left
Before
Execution
Rotate Right by 1 Point
After
Execution
Editing Area
Figure 3Ć35: Rotate right
If Rotate region left/right is selected when the Select arrow key function item
is selected in the Settings menu, data can be rotated to the left or right with the
arrow buttons.
3Ć40
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Table and Binary. In the table and binary displays you can rotate data using any of
the following:
H
Rotate up
H
Rotate down
The cursor becomes the area cursor. The data inside the editing area is rotated by
one point up or down. Data that overflows the editing area cycles around and is
added to the top or bottom of the edit area.
If Rotate region up/down is selected when the Select arrow key function item
is selected in the Settings menu, data can be rotated to the up or down with the
arrow buttons.
Creating Standard Pattern
Data
Table 3-9 and Figure 3-36 present descriptions and examples of the standard
pattern data.
Table 3Ć9: Standard pattern data descriptions
Standard pattern data
Description
Binary up counter
Creates a binary up counter data pattern. The cursor becomes the
area cursor. The number of bits in the counter is the total number
of bits in the group set up with the Set scope item in the Execute
Action menu. When Binary up counter is selected, the instrument
asks for the Points/Step value. This value sets the number of data
points per counter step. When the counter reaches its maximum
value, the value returns to 0 and it repeats the countĆup operation.
Binary down counter
The use is the same as Binary up counter. The action is the same
except that a binary down counter is created., and when the
counter reaches 0, the value returns to its maximum value and it
repeats the countĆdown operation.
Johnson counter
Creates a Johnson counter data pattern. When this menu item is
selected, the instrument asks for the Points/Step value. This value
sets the number of data points per counter step.
Graycode counter
Creates a Gray code counter data pattern. When this menu item is
selected, the instrument asks for the Points/Step value. This value
sets the number of data points per counter step.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć41
Edit Menu
Binary Up Counter
Binary Down Counter
Johnson Counter
Graycode Counter
Figure 3Ć36: Standard pattern data
Operation. Creating the standard pattern data
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Set the editing range in the point direction.
Set the editing range in the group/bit direction.
Execute Action
3Ć42
Select from the following items.
Binary up counter
Binary down counter
Johnson counter
Graycode counter
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Enhanced Action Menu
The Enhanced Action menu uses special editing functions. When All is selected
from the Region side menu the whole area is edited, and when Entered is
selected from the Region side menu, From and Size parameters can be specified.
Clock Pattern
Generates a clock pattern. The edit object can be any bit. Figure 3-37 shows the
creation of a clock pattern enclosed in a frame and the generation of the pattern
in the target bit.
Clock Pattern Example
HighĂDataĂ:Ă20 Points
Start : Low
Low Data : 10 Points
DestĂBitĂ:ĂDATA0
RegionĂ:ĂEntered
Points
0
50
100
DATA0
SizeĂ:Ă100
FromĂ:Ă0
Figure 3Ć37: Creating the clock pattern
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć43
Edit Menu
Popup Menu.
Figure 3Ć38: Clock Pattern popup menu
Table 3-10 describes the parameter items.
Table 3Ć10: Parameter Items
Parameter item
Function
Low Data
The length (number of points) of the data 0 part of the clock pulse. The
maximum is 100 points.
High Data
The length (number of points) of the data 1 part of the clock pulse. The
maximum is 100 points.
Dest Bit
The bit in which to write the pattern.
From
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the first point in the bit from which the pattern is written.
Size
When Entered was selected as the Region side menu item, specifies
the length (number of points) of the clock pattern.
Side Menu
3Ć44
Menu item
Function
Start
Determines the state at pulse start. When Low is selected, the value
will be 0. When High is selected, the value will be 1.
Region
The values All and Entered can be set. When All is selected, all of the
Dest Bit memory is filled with the pattern. When Entered is selected,
the pattern is written to the area specified by the From and Size
parameters.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Operation. Generate a clock pattern
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Enhanced Action
Clock Pattern
OK
Region (Select All or
Entered)
Start (Select Low or
High)
Set the parameters in the popup menu. (Low Data, High Data, Dest Bit, From, Size)
OK
Shift Register Generator
Sets up the configuration for the pseudo random pulse generator that uses a shift
register.
The shift register pseudo random pulse generator consists of a register with
between 1 and 32 bits and a feedback loop. This feedback loop takes the value
that is shifted out of the register, performs the exclusive OR with one or more
bits within the register, and places the result in the first bit of the register. The
position at which an exclusive OR is set is called a tap, and certain tap configurations produce series that are the longest possible. The data generated by such a
configuration is called an M-series. If the number of stages in the shift register is
n, then an M-series pseudo-random signal will have a length of 2n–1.
Create a simple register and tap setup as follows:
H
Register length: 3
H
Register value: 101
H
Set the tap with the Maximum Length Taps item.
Figure 3-39 shows the output for the above settings.
Register Length
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1 0 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
One Period
Output
1
0
1 1
1
0
0 1
0
Tap
Figure 3Ć39: Register value and tap setting example
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć45
Edit Menu
Popup Menu.
Figure 3Ć40: Shift Register Generator popup menu
Table 3-11 describes the parameter items.
Table 3Ć11: Shift register generator parameters
3Ć46
Parameter
Function
Register Diagram
Use the 0 and 1 numeric keys to set the register's initial value. Use the
-" button to toggle taps.
Register Length
Sets the register length. The register length can be set to a value
between 1 and 32.
Points/Step
The number of data points set for each shift of the register.
Dest Bit
The bit to which the pattern is written
From
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the first point from which the pattern is written.
Size
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the number of points into which the pattern is written.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Side Menu
Item
Function
Set All Registers
Sets the value of all the register bits to 1.
Maximum Length Tap
Sets the taps to positions such that the output becomes a tap MĆseries
for the current register length. There are multiple tap combinations for
MĆseries bit series. Each time the Maximum Length Tap button is
pressed, the tap combination changes.
Region
The values All and Entered can be set. When All is selected, all of the
Dest Bit memory is filled with the pseudoĆrandom pulse pattern. When
Entered is selected, the pattern is written to the area specified by the
From and Size parameters.
Operation. Set the register value input and taps
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Enhanced Action
Shift Register Generator
OK
Region (Select All or
Entered)
Set the parameters in the popup menu.
(Register Length, Points/Step, Dest Bit, From, Size)
Use the general purpose knob to select bits for setting in the register.
Set the value of a bit in the register with the 0 and 1 numeric keys.
Set the tap on/off state for a bit using the -" numeric key.
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć47
Edit Menu
Logical Operation
Performs a logical operation between pattern data in two (source) bits, and
replaces the data in a destination bit with the result. Figure 3-41 shows an
example of a logical operation where the AND operator was selected.
OperationĂ:ĂAND
RegionĂ:ĂEntered
Points
0
Write the result of the logical AND of the
Src 1 Bit and the Src 2 Bit to the Dest Bit.
50
100
Src 1 Bit:
DATA0
Src 2 Bit:
DATA1
Dest Bit:
DATA4
SizeĂ:Ă100
FromĂ:Ă0
Figure 3Ć41: Logical AND Operation Example
Popup Menu.
Figure 3Ć42: Logical Operation popup menu
Table 3-12 describes the parameter items.
3Ć48
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć12: Logical operation parameters
Parameter
Function
Src 1 Bit
Specifies a bit that will be used as an operand to the operation.
Src 2 Bit
Specifies the other bit that will be used as the other operand to the
operation.
Operation
Specifies the type of the operation.
Selection item
Description
AND
Logical AND
OR
Logical OR
NAND
Logical NAND
NOR
Logical NOR
EXOR
Logical exclusive OR
EXNOR
Logical exclusive NOR
Dest Bit
The bit to which the result pattern is written
From
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the first point in the bit from which the pattern is written.
Size
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the number of points in the bit in which the pattern is written. The
Maximum 9999 points can be entered. Entering 0 causes to quit the
popup menu.
Operation. Apply a logical operation to two data items
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Enhanced Action
Logical Operation
OK
Region (Select All or
Entered)
Set the parameters in the popup menu.
(Src 1 Bit, Src 2 Bit, Operation, Dest Bit, From, Size)
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć49
Edit Menu
Bit Operation
Copies or moves data between bits in the specified area.
Popup Menu.
Figure 3Ć43: Bit Operation popup menu
Table 3-13 describes the parameter items.
Table 3Ć13: Bit operation parameters
3Ć50
Parameter
Function
Src Bit
Specifies the source data for the operation.
Operation
Specifies the type of the operation.
Selection item
Description
Copy
Copies the data, overwriting the destination
data.
Exchange
Exchanges the data in the source and
destination bits.
Invert copy
Copies the data. However, logically inverts the
data before overwriting the destination data.
Dest Bit
The bit to which the pattern is written.
From
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the first point in the bit from which the pattern is written.
Size
When Entered was selected in the Region side menu item, specifies
the number of points in the bit in which the pattern is written. The
Maximum 9999 points can be entered. Entering 0 causes to quit the
popup menu.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Operation. Move or copy pattern data
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Enhanced Action
Bit Operation
OK
Region (Select All or
Entered)
Set the parameters in the popup menu.
(Src Bit, Operation, Dest Bit, From, Size)
OK
Serial Code Converter
Converts data in the source by writing specified output data to the destination as
one of a set patterns is found in the source data.
Refer to Conversion Table Examples on page C-6 for examples of how to
convert pattern data to different format.
Popup Menu. The menu for setting the bit and area that will be the code
conversion source data, and the bit and area where the result of the code
conversion will be written is displayed using the following operation. (See
Figure 3-44.) Select the item with the up and down arrow buttons, and use the
general purpose knob and the numeric keys to set the parameter value.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Enhanced Action
Serial Code Converter
OK
Figure 3Ć44: Serial Code Converter menu
Table 3-14 describes the parameter items.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć51
Edit Menu
Table 3Ć14: Serial code converter parameters
Parameter
Function
Src Bit
Specifies the bit from which the source data will be read.
Src Start
Specifies the point from which reading the source data will begin.
Src Size
Specifies the number of points of source data that will be read.
Dest Bit
Specifies the bit into which the converted data will be written.
Dest Start
Specifies the point from which converted data will be written.
Dest Size
Specifies the number of points of converted data that will be written.
Pressing the OK side button starts the conversion.
Side Menu
Menu item
Function
Load Table Data1
Reads in a code conversion table from mass memory. The file will be
an ASCII file with the extension .TBL. The operation is identical to that
for Load Data & Setup from the File menu.
Save Table Data
Writes a code conversion table to mass memory. The file must be an
ASCII file with the extension .TBL. The operation is identical to that for
Save Data & Setup from the File menu.
Edit Table Data
Edits a code conversion table. This is explained below.
Code Conversion Table Editing. Figure 3-45 shows the Edit Code Table menu,
which is displayed when the Edit Table Data side menu item is selected. The
SOURCE CONDITION section of this table defines the templates used for
pattern matching. The instrument compares these templates with data sequences
in the source data to find matching patterns.
NOTE. The data code conversion table files are arranged in essentially the same
manner as displayed on the table editing screen. In these files a comma is used
to delimit fields, and CR+LF to delimit lines. No spaces appear in the file.
Pattern matching is performed in order starting at the top of the table. Pattern
matching is more reliable if templates with more bits (longer templates) appear
towards the top of the table.
The matching process moves along the input data as follows. The current
position is set to the start point, and the table is used to find a match for the data
at that position. When a match is found, the output code for that template is
written to the destination. The current position is then moved on by the width of
the pattern in the CURRENT column. The process then repeats.
3Ć52
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
This continues until the destination is full. If the end of the input data is reached
before the destination is full, the current position returns to the start point in the
source data.
Figure 3Ć45: Edit Code Table menu
Table 3-15 describes the parameter items in the Edit Code Table menu.
Refer to Conversion Table Examples on page C-6 for examples of how to
convert pattern data to different format.
Table 3Ć15: Edit Code Table parameters
Parameter
Function
PAST
For the template to match, the data in the source immediately behind
the current position (i.e. data that has already been read) must match
this pattern.
CURRENT
For the template to match, the data in the source at the current position
must match this pattern.
NEXT
For the template to match, the data in the source at a position ahead of
the current position by the width of the pattern in the CURRENT
column must match this pattern.
PAST OUTPUT
For the template to match, the data at the end of the destination (i.e.
most recently written data) must match this pattern.
OUTPUT CODE
When the whole template matches, the data specified in this column is
written to the destination.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć53
Edit Menu
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Insert Empty Line
Inserts an empty line before the line currently indicated by the block
cursor.
Delete Line
Deletes the line currently indicated by the block cursor.
Delete All Lines
Deletes all lines in the table.
NOTE. The maximum size of the table data is 1024 lines.
Operation. The procedure for editing a code conversion table is as follows:The
four arrow buttons are used to move the cursor. The general purpose knob can
also be used for cursor movement. The CURSOR button causes the general
purpose knob to switch between controlling vertical and horizontal movement.
Use these procedures to move the cursor to the target location and then use the
numeric keys to edit the data. Table 3-16 lists the roles of the numeric keys.
Table 3Ć16: Numeric key description
Numeric Key
Description
0
Sets the table data at the cursor to 0.
1
Sets the table data at the cursor to 1.
-
Sets the table data at the cursor to the don'tĆcare state.
The delete key clears the table data in the area that contains the cursor.
Sometimes, data at positions other than the cursor position may be changed. For
example, pressing 0 or 1 near the center of the SOURCE CONDITION’s
CURRENT field when the field is empty changes data from the start of that area
to the cursor position.
3Ć54
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Make Sequence Menu
A sequence is a function to output blocked pattern data in a predetermined
sequence as specified in a sequence table. In the sequence table, repeat count,
trigger wait, event jump and calling subsequences are used, as well as placing the
blocked patterns in a sequential order.
H
The blocked patterns are output in the line-numbered order defined in the
sequence table.
H
A patterned data or subsequence can be defined in each line in the sequence
table.
H
A line can be repeated on output from 1 to 65536 times or infinitely.
H
A line can wait trigger event for output.
H
A line can be jumped to a specified line by the trigger of event signal.
Figure 3-46 shows an example of a sequence. In this example, two subsequences
SUB1 waiting trigger event, a blocked pattern data BK1 to be infinitely repeated
and jumped to the line 3 on event signal, and blocked pattern data BK4 are
defined.
Line number of
the current line
pointer position
Line Pointer
Figure 3Ć46: Make Sequence menu and a sequence example
NOTE. Enhanced columns in Figure 3-46 does not become effective unless the
run mode is not set to Enhanced. For enhanced mode, refer to Run Mode Menu
on page 3-75.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć55
Edit Menu
As already stated, sequence can call subsequences. Each subsequence is
composed of blocked patterns with specified repeat count.
Figure 3-47 shows an example of a subsequence. This subsequence is called by
the sequence shown in Figure 3-47.
Figure 3Ć47: Make Subsequence menu and a subsequence example
Insert
Inserts a new sequence step at the position of the line pointer. In the Make
Sequence menu, block or subsequence can be inserted in each line. The BLOCK
column of the lines inserted with subsequences becomes highlight gray to
distinguish from those inserted with blocks, as shown in Figure 3-46.
Operation. Insert a sequence step
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Make Sequence
Move the cursor to the line where the step is to be inserted using the general purpose knob.
Insert
Select the block.
3Ć56
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Delete
Deletes the sequence step at the position of the line pointer.
Operation. Delete a sequence step
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Make Sequence
Move the cursor to the line where the step is to be deleted using the general purpose knob.
Delete
Repeat Count
Sets the block repeat count for the step at the position of the line pointer.
Operation. Set the block repeat count for the step
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Make Sequence
Move the cursor to the line where the repeat count is to be set using the general purpose knob.
Repeat Count
(set the repeat count)
Set Enhanced Control
Sets up the sequence control options that become valid when the instrument is in
enhanced mode. See the SETUP! Run Mode ! Enhanced for the enhanced
operation.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Trig Wait
When set to ON, data output stops when the specified sequence
position is reached and the instrument waits for a trigger input.
Event Jump
When set to ON, if an event occurs during output of the specified line,
control jumps to the set line.
Jump to
Specifies the jump destination (line number) for the Event Jump
function.
Repeat
When Count is selected, that block is repeated the number of times
specified by the Repeat Count setting. When Infinite is selected, the
block is repeated indefinitely.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć57
Edit Menu
Special
Deletes and registers sequences.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Delete All
Deletes all sequences.
Make Simple
Sequence
Registers all currently defined block in order as a sequence.
Edit SubĆ
Sequence
Creates or edits subsequence. This subsequence can be included in
the sequence and will be expanded into the sequence when executed.
A subsequence can be created and edited as is performed for the
sequence using the reduced menu structure. Only block and repeat
count can be defined in the subsequence.
Refer to Creating and Editing Subsequences described in the next
paragraph.
Creating and Editing
Subsequences
3Ć58
You can newly create a subsequence or edit existed a subsequence. Use the menu
items under the Edit Sub-sequence menu item.
Item
Function
New
Newly creates a subsequence. When the New is selected, the Make
SubĆSequence popup menu and the side menu including Insert,
Delete, Repeat and OK appear. Use these menu items to create a
subsequence.
Open
Opens a subsequence to be edited. When the Open is selected, the
popup menu for subsequence selection list brings up. Select a
subsequence from the list, then the Make SubĆSequence popup menu
and the side menu including Insert, Delete, Repeat and OK appear.
Use these menu items to edit the subsequence.
Remove
Removes a subsequence. When the Remove is selected, the popup
menu for subsequence selection list brings up. Select a subsequence
to be removed.
Clear
Removes all existed subsequences.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
Limitations on Using
Subsequences
The following list describes limitations on using subsequences:
H
Each line can contain only one data pattern block
H
Each line can be repeated up to 65,536 times
H
Each subsequence can contain up to 256 lines
H
You can define up to 50 subsequences
Sequence memory usage. Sequence memory controls the maximum number of
subsequence calls and their repeat counts that can be run. When you run a
sequence, the DG2030 compiles the sequence and subsequence lines into internal
codes that are stored in the sequence memory. The DG2030 then uses the
sequence memory code to output the block data. There is one internal code item
for each sequence line except for lines that contains a subsequence call.
For subsequence calls without a repeat count, the DG2030 compiles a number of
internal code items equal to the number of lines in the subsequence.
For subsequence calls with a repeat count, the DG2030 compiles a number of
internal code items equal to the repeat count for that subsequence call times the
number of lines in the subsequence. For example, if a sequence line has a
subsequence call with the repeat count of 25 and that subsequence has two lines,
the DG2030 generates 50 internal code items for that sequence line and stores
them in the sequence memory. This occurs for each subsequence call. Figure
3-48 illustrates how the DG2030 compiles the sequence and subsequences into
the internal codes and stores them in the sequence memory.
Defining subsequence calls with large repeat counts can generate internal code
that consumes a large amount of sequence memory. This can result in insufficient
memory errors. The DG2030 does not check for sequence memory availability
errors. If you run a sequence and the DG2030 displays a memory error message,
reduce the number of subsequence calls, number of repeat counts and/or number
of lines in the subsequences.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć59
Edit Menu
Internal code image in
the sequence memory
Sequence and subsequence example
Suppose that the block pattern data: BK1,
BK2, BK3, BK5 and BK7 has been created
in the pattern memory.
Sequence:
BK1
SUB8
BK2
SUB8
BK3
SUB8
6
25
1
15
4
5
Subsequence call
Compile
Subsequence: SUB8
BK7
BK5
2
3
BK1
BK7
BK5
SSS
BK7
BK5
BK2
BK7
BK5
SSS
BK7
BK5
BK3
BK7
BK5
SSS
BK7
BK5
Repeat 3
Repeat 2
Repeat 3
Repeat 2
Repeat 3
Repeat 1
Repeat 2
Repeat 3
Repeat 2
Repeat 3
Repeat 4
Repeat 2
Rrepeat 3
Repeat 2
Repeat 3
25 times
15 times
5 times
Figure 3Ć48: Example of a sequence expanded into sequence memory
About Event Jump
In enhanced mode the sequence program can jump to the line number set in the
Event Jump field in response to an event input from the rear panel connector
when the output reaches the end of the block in the block field. This is called the
event jump function.
The event jump function can be applied to any line in the sequence program with
the Make Sequence ! Set Enhanced Control ! Event Jump menu item.
In enhanced mode, after the block data for a sequence program for which the
event jump function has been set has finished outputting, the DG2030 determines whether to perform an event jump.
The fact that an event request occurred is stored in a flip-flop in the pattern
control circuit when either a low level to high level transition occurs in the event
input, or the front panel STEP/EVENT button is pressed.
Then, when the end of the output of the block in a line for which the Event
Jump item is set approaches, the DG2030 checks the state of that flip-flop,
activates the event jump operation, and clears the flip-flop. Keep it in mind that,
even in the trigger wait state and during the output of data for a block for which
the Event Jump item was set to off, a rising edge in the signal applied to the
event input is seen as an event request, and causes the next event jump operation
to occur.
3Ć60
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Edit Menu
The event jump operation occurs even if the block pattern has not been output
for the number of repeats set in the sequence program. When an event jump
operation occurs, a positive TTL-level pulse 40 to 50 clocks wide is output from
the front panel event output connector 48 to 53 clocks before the block pattern
switches.
Event
Input
Clock
Output
Event Reception Period for Block B
47 Clock Cycles + T1
Refer to Note Below
48 to 53 Clock Cycles + T1
48 to 53 Clock Cycles + T2
Event
Output
T3
Data
Output
Block A
45 to 50 Clock Cycles
T3
The nth Output of Block B
Block C
n: A value between 1 and the value determined by the iteration count
T1: The event input delay time
T2: The event output delay time
T3: The delay time between clock output and data output
Note: If an event exists before the event out starts rising, the event jump will be made at
the next block. If the the event is coming after the event out starts rising, the event jump
will be performed at the block after the next block.
The number of clock varies depending on the pattern size of that block. This is because
the clock is generated from the ECL clock circuit by dynamically dividing into 9 or 10
cycles.
Figure 3Ć49: Event jump operation timing
Undo
Reverses editing operations performed on the data. Immediately after the Undo
function is used, executing Undo again executes the reversed editing operation.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć61
Edit Menu
3Ć62
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
The bottom menu for the SETUP menu includes the Group Assign, Output
Condition, Level Condition, Timing Condition, Run Mode, Trigger, and
Clock items. This section describes these items. Table 3-17 lists the functions of
the SETUP menu items and the pages where their documentation appears.
Table 3Ć17: SETUP menu functions
Bottom
Side or popup menu
Function
Page
Group Assign
Add Group
Adding a group
3Ć66
Delete Group
Deleting a group
3Ć67
Rename
Renaming a group
3Ć68
Group Bit(s) Config
Changing a group's bit configuration
3Ć68
Reset All bits Assign
Deleting a group definition
3Ć68
Assign Condition
Assigning data bit to output channel
3Ć69
Event Level
Setting the event control input level
3Ć70
Event
Setting the event control to enable or disable
Inhibit Level
Setting the inhibit control input level
Change Inhibit
Control
Selecting an inhibit control on each output
channel
Output Condition
Control Condition
Level Condition
Timing Condition
High
Setting the output high level
3Ć72
Low
Setting the output low level
3Ć72
Z on Stop
Setting the output impedance when output is
stopped
3Ć73
Rise
Adjusting the slope of edges
3Ć73
Delay
Setting the delay timing
3Ć75
Repeat
Selecting a run mode
3Ć75
Fall
Run Mode
Trigger
Single
3Ć76
Step
3Ć77
Enhanced
3Ć77
Update
Setting the data update method
3Ć78
Slope
Selecting a trigger slope
3Ć79
Trigger Level
Setting the trigger level
3Ć79
Impedance
Setting the trigger input impedance
3Ć80
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć63
Setup Menu
Table 3Ć17: SETUP menu functions (Cont.)
Bottom
Side or popup menu
Function
Page
Trigger
Source
Selecting a trigger source
3Ć80
Specifying the trigger interval.
3Ć80
Source
Setting the clock source
3Ć81
Int Frequency
Setting the internal clock frequency
3Ć81
Ext Frequency
Inputting an external clock frequency
3Ć81
PLL
Setting up the PLL circuit
3Ć82
Interval
State
Time
Clock
Setup Display
This section describes the SETUP menu screen. Figure 3-50 shows the menu.
Table 3-18 provides descriptions and page number references.
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
Figure 3Ć50: SETUP menu display
3Ć64
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Table 3Ć18: Setup menu display
Screen
reference
Function
Page
1
Shows the pulse parameters set for a selected output channel
and frequency currently set.
3Ć73
2
Shows the method selected for data output highĆimpedance
control.
3Ć70
3
Shows the settings of the raise and fall time for each channel.
As referring to the displayed pulse image, the raise and fall
time can be set for the pulse pattern on each channel.
3Ć73
4
Shows the output delays. Delays can only be set for each
output channel.
3Ć75
5
Shows the high and low values of the output voltage. These
voltages can be set to arbitrary values between -1.5 and 3 V.
3Ć72
6
Shows the data bits and the group to which each data bit
belongs.
3Ć66
7
Shows the output channel. The channels are labeled numbered
0 through 7.
-
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć65
Setup Menu
Group Assign Menu
This menu is used to define groups for data bits. Up to 8 groups can be defined.
The popup menu shown in Figure 3-51 lists the currently defined groups.
Data Bits
Group Number
Figure 3Ć51: Group Assign popup menu
See Figure 2-8 for the group allocation.
Add Group
Adds a new group. A new group cannot be added if there are already 8 groups
defined.
Each data bit has a default group name. The default group names are DATA7 for
data bit 7, DATA6 for data bit 6, and so on. You can combine several data bits
into a new group and define a new group name.
The bit structure of a group is defined by specifying the MSB and LSB of the
group. If the bit structure of a new group overlaps with that of an existing group,
the newly defined group takes precedence and the structure of the existing group
is automatically modified. Figure 3-52 shows an example of a bit structure
assignment.
3Ć66
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Current data bit assignments (see Figure 3Ć51)
Data Bits
0
7
Group Number
0
1
2
3
4
Data bit assignments for an added group (an Example)
Data Bits
7
0
MSB
LSB
Data Bits in the Added Group
Figure 3Ć52: Bit structure assignment
Operation. Add a group
Bottom button
Popup menu
Group Assign
Side button
Add Group
Input the name of the new group.
OK
MSB
(Specify the MSB)
LSB
(Specify the LSB)
OK
OK
Delete Group
Deletes the group selected with the cursor. This function asks for confirmation
before actually deleting the group.
Operation. Delete a group
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Group Assign
Select the group to be deleted.
Delete Group
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć67
Setup Menu
Rename
Changes the name of the group selected with the cursor.
Operation. Rename a group
Group Bit(s) Config
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Group Assign
Select the group whose name is to be
changed.
Rename
Input a new name.
OK
Changes the bit configuration of the group selected with the cursor. If the result
of the changed configuration overlaps an existing group, the newly defined group
takes precedence.
Operation. Change a group’s bit configuration
Bottom button
Popup menu
Group Assign
Side button
Group Bit(s) Config
MSB
(Specify the MSB)
LSB
(Specify the LSB)
OK
Reset All bits Assign
Deletes the currently defined group definitions and returns the group settings to
the initial state. (See Appendix C.)
Operation. Delete a group definition
Bottom button
Group Assign
Popup menu
Side button
Reset All bits
Assign
OK
Output Condition Menu
This menu defines which data bits are assigned to which output channel. The
menu lists the data bits at the right and the output channels at the left (see Figure
3-53). Use the general purpose knob to select data bits and the up and down
arrow buttons to select output channels.
3Ć68
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Assign Condition
Assigns the selected data bit to the selected output channel. The currently set
value is overwritten.
Output Channel List
Data Bits List
Figure 3Ć53: Output channel assign popup menu
See Figure 2-8 for the output channel allocation.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Assign
Assigns the selected data bit to the selected output channel using the
popup menu brought up at the same time as this subĆmenu (see Figure
3Ć53). The currently set value is overwritten.
Release
Clear the data for the selected assignment.
Operation. Assign data bit to output channel
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output Condition
Side button
Assign Condition
Select a data bit with the general purpose knob.
Select the channel to be assigned using the up and down arrow buttons.
Assign
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć69
Setup Menu
NOTE. Note that the settings performed using the Output Channel Assign menu
do not take effect unless the OK button is pressed.
Operation. Clear output channel assignment
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output Condition
Side button
Assign Condition
Select the channel for which the data assignment is to be cleared using the up and down arrow
buttons.
Release
Control Condition
Sets the control method used to set output channels to the high-impedance state.
Table 3-19 shows the four high-impedance state control methods that can be
selected for each channel.
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Event Level
Sets the event control input threshold level. This level can be set in the
range -5 to +5 V.
Event
Enables or disables the event control.
Inhibit Level
Sets the inhibit control input threshold level. This level can be set in the
range -5 V to +5 V.
Change Inhibit
Control
Sets the control method used to set output channels to the highĆimpedĆ
ance state. Table 3Ć19 shows the four highĆimpedance state control
methods that can be selected for each channel.
Operation. Set the event input level
Bottom button
Output Condition
Popup menu
Side button
Control Condition
Event Level
(Set the event level)
3Ć70
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Operation. Enable or disable the event control
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output Condition
Side button
Control Condition
Event (Select Enable
or Disable)
Operation. Set the inhibit level
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output Condition
Side button
Control Condition
Inhibit Level (Set the
inhibit level)
Operation. Select an impedance state control method
Bottom button
Popup menu
Output Condition
Side button
Control Condition
Select the channel to be set up for highĆimpedance control with the up and down arrow buttons.
Channel Inhibit ConĆ
trol
Select one of Off, Internal, External, and Both.
OK
Table 3Ć19: Impedance state contol methods
Selection item
Description
OFF
No highĆimpedance control (output is always enabled)
Internal
Controlled by the channel 0 signal (highĆimpedance when high)
External
Controlled by an external impedance control signal (highĆimpedance
when high)
Both
Controlled by both the channel 0 and external impedance control
signals (highĆimpedance when either signal is high)
Since the channel 0 signal for each output cannot control its own high-impedance state, these channels must be set to either OFF or External. Figure 3-54
shows a schematic overview of the high-impedance control circuit.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć71
Setup Menu
OE
Data Output
Off
Internal
CH 0
Both
External Inhibit Input
External
Figure 3Ć54: HighĆimpedance control circuit
Level Condition Menu
This menu sets the channel output high and low voltage levels, and whether
output is disabled in the output stopped state.
High
Determines the output voltage when the data value is 1 (high level state). You
can set the level within the range between –1.25 V and +3.50 V (into 50 W load).
The difference between the high level and low level voltages must be between
0.25 V and 5 V. The displayed voltages are the voltages when the outputs are
open.
Operation. Set the output high level
Bottom button
Popup menu
Level Condition
Low
Side button
High (the high level
setting)
Determines the output voltage when the data value is 0 (low level state). You can
set the level within the range between –1.50 V and +3.25 V (into 50 W load).
The difference between the low level and high level voltages must be between
0.25 V and 5 V. The displayed voltages are the voltages when the outputs are
open.
Operation. Set the output low level
Bottom button
Level Condition
3Ć72
Popup menu
Side button
Low (the low level
setting)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Z on Stop
Sets whether all outputs should be set to the high-impedance state or whether
they should continue to output their current values when the output is stopped
with the START/STOP button. When Z on Stop is set to On, the output is set
to the high-impedance state.
Operation. Set the output impedance when output is stopped
Bottom button
Level Condition
Popup menu
Side button
Z on Stop
(select On or Off)
Timing Condition Menu
This menu lets you set each channel’s rise, fall, and delay timing parameters.
Figure 3-55 shows the current rise and fall time settings of an example output
channel. You can also see the same image in the SETUP menu. Highlighted lines
indicate the pulse edges currently set. The three non-highlighted horizontal lines
from the top indicate the highest, 0 and lowest voltage levels that can be set. The
two non-highlighted vertical lines indicate the signal rising edge at left and
falling edge at right.
If the pulse edges are positioned at the non-highlighted vertical lines, the positive
delay is currently set to zero. If the pulse edges are positioned left of the
non-highlighted lines, the output pattern data will be delayed.
You can adjust the rise and fall times within this range indicated by two
non-highlighted slope lines or set to FAST. When you try to set a rise or fall time
out of the valid range, the display flashes the word Rise or Fall beneath the
menu pulse image.
The range varies depending on the pulse amplitude. See Figure A-1 on page A-4
for the relationship between range and pulse amplitude and the value represented
by FAST.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć73
Setup Menu
The rise time can be adjusted within this
range or set to FAST.
Delay: 10.00 ns
Rise:
4.2 ns
Fall:
FAST
The fall time can be adjusted within this
range or set to FAST.
Figure 3Ć55: Example rise, fall, and delay parameters
Rise
Operation. Set the rise time
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Timing Condition
Select the channel for which the rise time is to be set using the knob.
Rise
Turn the knob to set a rise time. When you want to set the rise time to FAST enter 0 from the
front panel keyboard.
Fall
Operation. Set the fall time
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Timing Condition
Select the channel for which the rise time is to be set using the knob.
Fall
Turn the knob to set a rise time. When you want to set the rise time to FAST enter 0 from the
front panel keyboard.
3Ć74
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Delay
The delay can be adjusted set in the range –5.0 ns to 18.0 ns in 0.02 ns steps for
each output.
Operation. Set the output delay
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Timing Condition
Select the channel for which the rise time is to be set using the knob.
Delay
(the delay setting)
Run Mode Menu
This menu sets the run mode used to output pattern data, and sets the pattern data
output update method used when data is changed.
Operation. Set the run mode
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Run Mode
Repeat
Select the run mode
(Repeat, Single, Step,
or Enhanced)
Pattern data is iteratively output. When no sequence is defined, all of the pattern
data is output iteratively as a single pattern as shown in Figure 3-56. If a
sequence is defined, the sequence ordering and repeat (Repeat Count) functions
are applied. The extended sequence functions (trigger input, event jump, etc.) are
ignored as shown in Figure 3-57.
Pattern Data Output
Pattern Data
Pattern Data
Figure 3Ć56: Repeat Mode pattern data output (when no sequence is defined)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć75
Setup Menu
Line No.
Block
Repeat Count
0
BK0
1
1
BK1
3
2
BK2
2
Line No.
Sequence
Output
0
BK0
BK0
2
BK1 BK1
BK2
Pattern Data
1
BK1
BK1
BK2
0
BK2
BK0
1
BK1
BK1
2
BK1 BK2
BK2
Sequence
Figure 3Ć57: Repeat Mode pattern data output (when a sequence is defined)
Single
Pattern data is output only once when a trigger input is received. A trigger signal
is received either when the front panel FORCE TRIGGER button is pressed or
when an external trigger signal is input to the TRIGGER INPUT connector.
When no sequence is defined, all of the pattern data is output as a single
waveform as shown in Figure 3-58. If a sequence is defined, the sequence
ordering and repeat (Repeat Count) functions are applied as shown in Figure
3-59. The extended sequence functions (trigger input, event jump, etc.) are
ignored.
Pattern Data Output
Pattern Data
Trigger Input
Figure 3Ć58: Single Mode pattern data output (when no sequence is defined)
3Ć76
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Line no.
Block
Repeat Count
0
BK0
1
1
BK1
3
2
BK2
2
Line No.
Sequence Output
0
BK0
BK0
BK1
BK2
Pattern Data
1
BK1
BK1
2
BK1
BK2
BK2
Trigger Input Wait
Sequence
Trigger Input
Figure 3Ć59: Single Mode pattern data output (when a sequence is defined)
Step
Enhanced
Pattern data is output not according to the internal clock, but rather according to
a clock signal generated manually with the STEP/EVENT button. Pattern data
is output using the method used by the Repeat item.
Pattern data is output as defined by the sequence. The extended sequence
functions (trigger input, event jump, etc.) are valid during this output. The
Repeat Count item setting is used for sequences for which the repeat count is
not set to Infinite. Figure 3-60 shows an example of an enhanced mode
sequence. Also refer to the description of the EDIT menu Make Sequence menu
on page 3-55.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć77
Setup Menu
Line No.
Sequence Output
Repeat
Count
Trigger Input
(Trig Wait)
BK0
1
On
BK1
Infinite
2
3
BK2
BK3
2
2
4
BK4
5
Line No.
Block
0
1
BK0
BK1
BK1
2
On
0
1
0
2
BK1
BK1
Event Jump
BK2
4
3
BK2
BK3
BK3
BK4
BK4
0
1
BK0
BK1
Trigger input
wait state
Trigger Input
Jump to line no. 0
on an event input.
Jump to line no. 2
on an event input.
Event Input
Figure 3Ć60: Enhanced Mode sequence output
Update
Sets the update method for rewriting data to the output when pattern data, the
sequence, or other items are changed. Select Auto or Manual.
Auto. Rewrites the output data with new data immediately at the point when any
change occurs to the pattern data. The START/STOP button LED indicator
blinks rapidly during data update.
Manual. The output data is not immediately rewritten when the pattern data is
changed. When the displayed data and the output data differ, the START/STOP
button’s LED indicator blinks slowly. To rewrite the pattern data, stop data
output temporarily by pressing the START/STOP button, and then restart output
by pressing the START/STOP button once again. Also note that changed pattern
data is also written when the run mode changes.
Operation. Set the data update method
Bottom button
Run Mode
3Ć78
Popup menu
Side button
Update (Select Auto
or Manual)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Trigger Menu
This menu sets the trigger settings. Figure 3-61 shows the setting selections.
Rising Edge
Falling Edge
Trigger Level
Adjustment
Trigger Slope Selection
Figure 3Ć61: Trigger slope and level control
Slope
Sets whether a trigger is recognized on either a rising or falling edge of the signal
applied to the trigger input.
Positive: Rising edge
Negative: Falling edge
Operation. Set the trigger slope
Bottom button
Popup menu
Trigger
Level
Side button
Slope (Select Positive
or Negative)
Sets the threshold voltage for detecting a trigger. The value can be set from –5 V
to +5 V in 0.1 V steps.
Operation. Set the trigger level
Bottom button
Trigger
Popup menu
Side button
Level (Set the trigger
level.)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć79
Setup Menu
Impedance
Sets the trigger input connection impedance. An impedance of either 50 W or 1
kW can be set.
Operation. Set the trigger input impedance
Bottom button
Popup menu
Trigger
Source
Side button
Impedance (Select
50 W or 1 kW)
Selects internal (Int) or external (Ext) as a trigger source. When Int is selected,
the signal generated from the internal trigger generator is used. In this case, the
trigger signal can be generated repeatedly at a certain interval specified with the
Interval menu item. When Ext is selected, the trigger signal connected to the
TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel is used.
Operation. Select a trigger source
Bottom button
Popup menu
Trigger
Side button
Source
(Select Int or Ext)
NOTE. Regardless of the trigger source selection, pressing the FORCE
TRIGGER on the front panel causes to creat a trigger event.
Interval
When the internal trigger source is selected, this parameter sets the trigger
generator so as to repeatedly generate the trigger signal at a cetain interval. To
use, set the trigger interval to On and then set the interval period.
When the trigger source is set to internal and the trigger interval state is set to
Off, a trigger signal is not generated except by pressing the FORCE TRIGGER
button on the front panel.
Operation. Set the trigger interval to on or off, and trigger interval.
Bottom button
Trigger
Popup menu
Side button
Interval
State
(Select On or Off)
Time (Set the interval
time)
3Ć80
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setup Menu
Clock Menu
Determines the reference clock (and clock rate) used when pattern data is output.
Source
Determines whether the internal clock (Int) or an external input clock (Ext) is
used as the reference clock.
Operation. Set the clock source
Bottom button
Popup menu
Clock
Int FREQ
Side button
Source (Select Int or
Ext)
Sets the internal clock clock frequency. The frequency can be set in the range of
100 m Hz to 409.6 MHz. When Source is set to Int, the time axis resolution
used for the display of pattern data will be the reciprocal of this setting.
Operation. Set the internal clock frequency
Bottom button
Popup menu
Clock
Ext FREQ
Side button
Int FREQ (Set the
frequency)
Input a clock clock frequency to the external clock input. The frequency can be
set in the range 100 m Hz to 409.6 MHz. When Source is set to Ext, the time
axis resolution used for the display of pattern data will be the reciprocal of this
setting.
Operation. Input an external clock frequency
Bottom button
Clock
Popup menu
Side button
Ext FREQ (Set the
frequency)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć81
Setup Menu
PLL
Sets whether or not the PLL (phase locked loop) circuit is used for internal clock
frequency control. When this setting is On (PLL circuit used), the instrument
can provide a clock with a high frequency precision. When Off, the instrument
can provide a clock synchronized to an external trigger input. The off state
eliminates jitter due to differences in the relative timing of the clock and the
trigger signal.
Operation. Set up the PLL circuit
Bottom button
Clock
3Ć82
Popup menu
Side button
PLL (Select On or
Off)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Menu
There are no items in this menu in the current version of the firmware.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć83
Application Menu
3Ć84
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
The bottom menus for the UTILITY menu includes the Mass Memory, Cal,
Display/Hardcopy, System, De-skew, Status, and Diag items. When one of the
bottom menu items is selected the related base menu is displayed. Parameters are
selected using these base menus. Table 3-20 lists the functions of the UTILITY
menu items and the pages where their descriptions appear.
Table 3Ć20: SETUP menu functions
Bottom
Base menu or Side menu
Function
Page
Mass Memory
Change Directory
Changing the current directory
3Ć86
Make Directory
Creating directories
3Ć86
Rename
Changing a file or directory name
3Ć86
Copy
Copying files
3Ć86
Delete
Deleting files
3Ć86
Delete All
Deleting all files
3Ć87
Initialize Media
Formatting a floppy disk
3Ć88
Catalog order
Setting the directory listing order
3Ć88
Lock
Locking a file
3Ć88
Copy or Delete
Special
Cal
Execute
Executing the clock calibration
3Ć89
Display/Hardcopy
Clear Message Area
Removing message displays
3Ć93
System
Reset to Factory
Restoring the factory settings
3Ć97
Security Immediate
Erasing internal memory data
3Ć97
Reset Skew
Setting a skew on each output channel
3Ć98
Displaying the instrument information
3Ć99
Selecting functional block or all block and
executing
ti th
the di
diagnostic
ti ttest.t
3Ć99
DeĆskew
Status
Diag
Type
All
CPU
Display
FPanel
Clock
Trig
SMenu
TPMenu
Execute
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć85
Utility Menu
Mass Memory Menu
The Mass Memory menu is used to access the contents of the floppy disk
inserted in the instrument’s floppy disk drive. This menu supports changing and
creating directories, file copying and deleting, and floppy disk formatting.
Change Directory
Changes the current directory.
Operation. Change directory
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Change Directory
Select the directory to switch to.
Make Directory
Side button
OK
Creates a sub-directory in the current directory.
Operation. Create a directory
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Make Directory
Enter the name of the directory.
Rename
Side button
OK
Changes the name of a file or directory on the floppy disk. The file extension is
not changed by this function.
Operation. Change a file or directory name
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
Mass Memory
Select the file or directory to be renamed.
Rename
Clear String
Enter the new file or directory name.
Copy or Delete
OK
Copies or deletes files on the floppy disk.
Sub Menu
3Ć86
Item
Function
Copy
Copies the selected file on the floppy disk, creating a new file.
Delete
Deletes the selected file from the floppy disk.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Sub Menu
Item
Function
Delete All
Deletes all the files in the current directory.
Note: If there is a subĆdirectory in the current directory, and that
subĆdirectory is not empty, it will not be deleted. Also, locked files will
not be deleted.
Operation. Copy a file
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Side button
Copy or Delete
Select the file to copy.
Copy
OK
Enter the name of the copy of the file.
OK
Operation. Delete a file
NOTE. When deleting a file, the instrument asks for confirmation. Select either
OK or Cancel.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Side button
Copy or Delete
Select the file to delete.
Delete
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć87
Utility Menu
Special
Supports formatting floppy disks, setting the file listing display order, and
setting file locks.
Side Menu
Item
Function
Initialize Media
Formats a floppy disk. Selecting this menu item pops up a list of floppy
disk formats. Choose the format from the following list to format the
floppy disk:
IBMĆPC 2HD
PC9800 2HD
J3100 2HD
IBMĆPC 2DD
PC9800 2DD
The volume label DG2030 is automatically assigned to the floppy disk
by the formatting operation.
Catalog Order
Lock
Specifies the order for display when listing a directory. Select the order
from the following types:
Type
Order
NAME1
ASCII order
NAME2
Reverse ASCII order
TIME1
In order created starting with oldest
TIME2
In order created starting with newest
Changes the write protect attribute of the selected file. When the lock
attribute is On, writing is prohibited, and when the lock attribute is Off,
writing is allowed.
Operation. Format a floppy disk
NOTE. All data on a disk is deleted by the formatting operation. Always check
the contents of a disk before formatting it.
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Side button
Special
Initialize Media
Select the format type.
OK
OK
3Ć88
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Operation. Set the directory listing order
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Side button
Special
Catalog Order (Select
the display type)
Operation. Lock a file
Bottom button
Popup menu
Mass Memory
Side button
Special
Lock (Select On)
Cal Menu
Performs the calibration for the internal clock circuit. When the calibration
finishes without error, “Pass” is displayed in the Status display area. If an error
occurs, “Fail” is displayed and an error code appears in the Comment display
area.
Operation. Lock a file
Bottom button
Popup menu
Cal
Side button
Execute
Table 3Ć21: Error Code
Error code
Error meaning
Failed component
8XX
CAL error
Clock board
The clock calibration is recommended to be performed in the following cases:
H
After a 20-minute warm up period has been passed.
H
When you need data pattern output with high precision frequency.
H
When the ambient temperature is changed by about ±5_C since the previous
clock calibration.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć89
Utility Menu
Figure 3Ć62: Cal menu
Display/Hardcopy Menu
This menu is used to set the display and hardcopy settings. Select the items to be
changed using the up and down arrow buttons, and change the value or the item
using the left and right arrow buttons or the general purpose knob.
Date and time
display
Message
Area
Display
Menu
Clearing the
message
Hardcopy
Menu
Figure 3Ć63: Display/hardcopy menu
3Ć90
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Display
Sets the date and time display, adjusts the screen brightness, and sets the dimmer.
The dimmer function automatically reduces the screen brightness if the DG2030
is left for 10 minutes without any controls being used.
Base menu
Item
Function
Clock
The date and time are displayed at the upper right of the screen when
this setting is On.
Brightness
Adjusts the screen brightness. The value can be set in the range 0 to
100, with 100 being the maximum brightness. The default value is 70.
Dimmer
When set to On, the screen brightness is reduced if about 10 minutes
elapses without any front panel control being used. The screen returns
to its original brightness when any key is pressed.
Operation. Display the date and time
Bottom button
Popup menu
Display/Hardcopy
Select Display Clock with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select On with the left and right arrow buttons.
Operation. Adjust the screen brightness
Bottom button
Popup menu
Display/Hardcopy
Select Display Brightness with the up and
down arrow buttons.
Side button
Adjust the brightness.
Operation. Set the dimmer
Bottom button
Popup menu
Display/Hardcopy
Select Display Dimmer with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select On with the left and right arrow buttons.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć91
Utility Menu
Hardcopy
Sets the screen hard-copy data format settings, and sets the hard-copy output
port. For connecting the printer to the GPIB or RS-232-C port, also refer to the
System menu explained next. When you select Disk as a hardcopy port, you can
capture and save a screen image to a file in a specific format.
Base menu
Item
Function
Format
Sets the screen hardĆcopy data format. The following are the menu
options and the formats they specify.
Port
Menu item
Format
BMP
Windows BMP
Epson
Epson ESCĆP
EPS mono
Encapsulated Postscript
Thinkjet
HP Thinkjet
TIFF
TIFF
Sets the device for screen hardĆcopy data output.
Menu item
Device
DISK
Floppy disk
GPIB
GPIB
RS232C
Serial port
When hardĆcopy output is to the disk, a file name with the format
HC_XXX.YYY is used. Here, XXX is a serial number that is started
from 000, and YYY is an extension that depends on the format used.
XXX is chosen so as not to overwrite existing data. The table below
lists the correspondence between formats and extensions.
3Ć92
Menu item
Format
Extension
BMP
Windows BMP
BMP
Epson
Epson ESCĆP
ESC
EPS mono
Encapsulated Postscript
EPS
Thinkjet
HP Thinkjet
TJ
TIFF
TIFF
TIF
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Operation. Set the hard copy format
Bottom button
Popup menu
Display/Hardcopy
Select Hardcopy Format with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the format with the left and right arrow
buttons.
Operation. Select hardcopy output port
Bottom button
Popup menu
Display/Hardcopy
Select Hardcopy Port with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the port with the left and right arrow
buttons.
Clear Message Area
Clears the message displayed in the message area.
Operation. Remove message displays
Bottom button
Display/Hardcopy
Popup menu
Side button
Clear Message Area
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć93
Utility Menu
System Menu
This menu sets the instrument date, time, and the GPIB/serial port settings. The
GPIB and serial ports can be used for remote control and screen hardcopy. Select
the items to be changed using the up and down arrow buttons, and change the
value or the selection using the left and right arrow buttons or the general
purpose knob.
Remote Port
GPIB Menu
Serial Menu
Power up Pause
Date and Time Setting
Figure 3Ć64: System menu
Remote Port
Set the port used for external remote control. Either the GPIB or the RS232C
can be selected.
Operation. Remote port setup
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select Remote Port with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the port with the left and right arrow
buttons.
3Ć94
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
GPIB
Sets the GPIB operating mode and address of the DG2030 for remote control or
hardcopy.
Base Menu
Item
Function
Configure
Sets the GPIB operating mode.
Address
Operating Mode
Function
Talk/Listen
Normal remote control
Talk Only
Used for hardĆcopy output.
Off Bus
The connection between the
instrument and the bus is set to
the disconnected state.
Sets the instrument's GPIB address. The address can be set to a value
between 0 and 30.
Operation. Set the GPIB operating mode
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select GPIB Configure with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the operating mode with the left and
right arrow buttons.
Operation. Set the GPIB address
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select GPIB Address with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the address with the general purpose
knob.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć95
Utility Menu
Serial
Sets the baud rate, data length for transmitted data, parity, number of stop bit,
and flow control method for the serial port. These parameters are set to match the
settings of the connected external controller for remote control or printer for
hardcopy.
Base Menu
Item
Function
Baudrate
Sets the transmission rate for the serial port. A transmission rate of
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 can be set.
Data Bits
Sets the data length for the transmitted data. A data length of 7 or 8
bits can be set.
Parity
Sets the kind of parity bit attached to transmitted data. The parity can
be set to None, Even, or Odd.
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits can be set.
Handshake
Sets the flow control method. Either Off, Soft, or Hard can be set for
the flow control.
Operation. Set the serial interface parameters
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select the Serial parameter with the up and
down arrow buttons.
Side button
Select the item with the left and right arrow
buttons.
Power up Pause
Sets whether or not the instrument should wait for key input before starting
operation in the event a diagnostics error was detected at start up. This setting is
useful in cases where, for example, you do not want the system waiting for key
input.
Operation. Set the power-on pause
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select Power up Pause with the up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Select On with the left and right arrow buttons.
3Ć96
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Date/Time
Sets the internal clock date and time.
Operation. Set the date and time
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Select Date/Time with the up and down arrow
buttons.
Side button
Select the parameter to change with the left
and right arrow buttons.
Set the date and time with the general
purpose knob.
Reset to Factory
Resets the instrument settings to the default factory settings. The instrument
internal memory is not cleared by resetting to the factory settings. See Appendix
C for a table listing the instrument factory settings
Operation. Restore the factory settings
Bottom button
Popup menu
System
Side button
Reset to Factory
OK
Security Immediate
Erases the instrument’s internal memory data. At the same time, the instrument
is reset to the factory settings state.
Operation. Delete memory data
Bottom button
System
Popup menu
Side button
Security Immediate
OK
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć97
Utility Menu
DeĆskew Menu
Sets or reset the skew for each output channel. The skew can be set within the
range from –1.0 ns to +1.0 ns. See Figure 3-65 for the popup menu.
Figure 3Ć65: DeĆskew menu
Operation. Set the skew
Bottom button
Popup menu
DeĆskew
Select a output channel with up and down
arrow buttons.
Side button
Set the skew with the knob.
Operation. Reset the skew
3Ć98
Bottom button
Popup menu
Side button
DeĆskew
Select a output channel with up and down
arrow buttons.
Reset Skew
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Utility Menu
Status Display
Displays the instrument’s model number, the firmware version, the instrument’s
configuration, and other information. See Figure 3-66.
Figure 3Ć66: Status display
Diag Menu
Tests the instrument’s internal hardware. Diagnostics can be run as individual
tests, or all tests can be run in one operation. If the diagnostics complete with no
errors, ”Pass” is displayed in the Status display area. If an error occurs, ”Fail” is
displayed. An error code is displayed in the Comment display area if a
diagnostic test fails. See Figure 3-67.
NOTE. Contact your Tektronix sales representative if any errors occur.
Figure 3Ć67: Diag menu
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3Ć99
Utility Menu
Table 3-22 lists the error codes, their meaning, and failure board for the error
code. See the DG2030 Service Manual for detailed descriptions of the error
codes.
Table 3Ć22: Error Code
Error code
Description
Failed component
1XX
CPU diagnostics error
A6 CPU board
2XX
Display diagnostics error
A6 CPU board
3XX
Front panel diagnostics error
A12 Key board
4XX
Clock diagnostics / calibration error
A30 Clock board
5XX
Trigger diagnostics / calibration error
A30 Clock board
6XX
Sequence memory error
A50 PG&Output board
7XX
Pattern memory diagnostics error
A50 PG&Output board
Side Menu
Item
Function
Type
Selects the diagnostics test. Either individual items or all tests (All) can
be selected. An asterisk is displayed next to selected items.
Execute
Executes the diagnostic tests for the items marked with an asterisk.
Operation. Diagnostics
Bottom button
Diag
Popup menu
Side button
Type (Select a diagĆ
nostic test or All with
the general purpose
knob.)
Execute
3Ć100
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
The DG2030 specifications are divided into three categories:
H
Warranted characteristics. Warranted characteristics are described in terms of
quantifiable performance limits which are guaranteed.
H
Typical characteristics. Typical characteristics are described in terms of
typical or average performance for the DG2030. The characteristics
described herein are not absolutely guaranteed.
H
Functionality. Functionality describes instrument capabilities.
Items marked with asterisk (*) are tested in the Performance Verification
(Appendix B).
The certification and compliances for the DG2030 are also found at the end of
this appendix.
Warranted Characteristics
This section describes the warranted characteristics of the DG2030. These can be
divided into two categories: electrical characteristics and environmental
characteristics.
Items marked with asterisk (*) are tested in the Performance Verification
(Appendix B).
Performance Conditions
The electrical characteristics are valid under the following conditions:
H
The instrument must be in an environment with temperature, altitude,
humidity, and vibration within the operating limits described in these
specifications.
H
The instrument must have had a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes.
H
The instrument must have been calibrated/adjusted at an ambient temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C.
H
The instrument must be operating at an ambient temperature between
+10_ C to +40_ C, unless otherwise noted.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ1
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ1: Warranted electrical characteristics
Characteristics
Description
Performance test
Internal trigger generator
Internal trigger rate
Accuracy
±0.01 %
Data and clock out
*Output voltage
See page BĆ28.
Accuracy
DC (data out)
(±3 % of setting) ± 50 mV (into 50 W)
Amplitude (clock out)
(±5 % of setting) ± 50 mV (into 50 W)
Maximum Output Current
± 100 mA
*Rise/fall time (20 % to 80 %)
Accuracy
See page BĆ28.
(±10 % of setting) ±500 ps, within the variable range
*Channel skew
t ±300 ps, reference to the clock out, at 10 MHz, 50 % duty
and rise/fall times set to FAST.
*Delay function
Accuracy
See page BĆ33.
See page BĆ33.
(±3 % of setting) ±500 ps
±60 ps | Ambient temperature (_C) * 25 |,
At 10 MHz, 50 % duty, 1.5 V high, 0 V low, and rise/fall times set
to FAST.
Event input
Minimum pulse width
y 100 ns
Sensitivity
y 1.0 VpĆp
Inhibit input
AĆ2
Minimum pulse width
y 100 ns
Sensitivity
y 1.0 VpĆp
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ1: Warranted electrical characteristics (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
Performance test
Trigger input
Threshold
Accuracy
±(5 % of setting) ±0.1 V
Minimum pulse width
y 10 ns
Sensitivity
y 1.0 VpĆp
Impedance
50 W ±2 W
1 kW ±100 W
Unacceptable time on resetting
trigger
Minimum 100 ns
External clock input
Threshold level
+0.5 V
Input low voltage range
-2 V to 0.3 V
Input high voltage range
0.7 V to 2.0 V
Input frequency
DC to 406.9 MHz
Minimum pulse width
y 1.2 ns
Sensitivity
y 0.5 VpĆp
Maximum input level
x ±2 V
AC line power
Rating voltage
100Ć240 V AC
Voltage range
90Ć250 V AC
Input frequency range from 48.0 to 63.0 Hz
90Ć127 V AC
Input frequency range from 48.0 to 440.0 Hz
Maximum power
300 W
Maximum current
4A
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ3
Appendix A: Specifications
9
8
Rise / fall time (ns)
7
Maximum
6
5
4
Minimum
3
2
Fast
1
0
0
0.5
0
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
Amplitude ( into 50 W ) VpĆp
Figure AĆ1: Range of rise/fall times
AĆ4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Stop
Start
External trigger input
Clock output
Data output
D1N
D20
D10
Sync output
Td1
External inhibit
or
CH0 output
Data output
or
clock output
Td2
Td5
D25
D26
D27
D28
D2NĆ3 D2NĆ2 D2NĆ1
D2NĆ2
Pw1
(Typical) 57 ns + 1/Fclk (GHz) x Td1 x 57 ns + 2/Fclk (GHz)
Td2 = 13 ns (typical)
Pw1 = 9 or 10 clocks
Tac1 = 57 to 63 clocks
Td5 = 48 to 53 clocks
Pw2 = 45 to 50 clocks
Jump to the specified block after the current block
Event input
Event input
D24
Td4
Tac1
Data output
D23
External inhibit: Td3 = 34 ns, Td4 = 38 ns (typical)
CH0 output (Delay = 0): Td3 = 7 ns, Td4 = 11 ns (typical)
High_Z
Td3
D22
Jump to the specified block after the next block
Pw2
Event output
External
clock input
Clock output
Td6 = 36 ns (typical)
Td6
Figure AĆ2: Signal timing
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ5
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ2: Warranted environmental characteristics
Characteristics
Description
Temperature
Operating
+10 _C to +40 _C
NonĆoperating
-20 _C to +60 _C
Relative humidity
Operating
20% to 80% (No condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 29.4 _C
NonĆoperating
5% to 90% (No condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 40.0 _C
Altitude
Operating
To 4.5 km (15000 ft).
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1_C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
NonĆoperating
To 15 km (50000 ft).
Dynamics
Vibration
Operating
0.27 Grms, 5 to 500 Hz
NonĆoperating
2.28 Grms, 5 to 500 Hz
Shock
Non operating
294 m/s2 (30 G), halfĆsine, 11 ms duration.
Three shocks per axis in each direction (18 shocks total)
Installation requirements
Power consumption
300 watts max. Maximum line current is 4 A rms at 50 Hz
Dissipation (fully loaded)
90 V libe, with 5 % clipping
Surge current
x 9 A peak for less than 5 line cycles, at 25 _C, after product has been off for at least 30 s.
Cooling clearance
AĆ6
Top clearance
2.5 cm
(1 inch)
Side clearance
15 cm
(6 inches)
Rear clearance
7.5 cm
(3 inches)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Typical Characteristics
This section will describe the typical characteristics for the DG2030. These
values represent typical or average performance and are not absolutely guaranteed.
Table AĆ3: Electrical characteristics (typical)
Characteristics
Description
Data and clock out
Rise/fall time (20 % to 80 %)
Value in FAST
500 ps, at 0.25 VpĆp to 1 VpĆp
t Value represented by FAST line from 2 VpĆp to 5 VpĆp in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5, at 1 VpĆp
to 2 VpĆp
t 0.8
Minimum value, at 2 VpĆp to 5 VpĆp
Aberration
Overshoot
x 5 % at 3.5 VpĆp
Amplitude (clock out)
x 5 % at 3.5 VpĆp
Period jitter
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table AĆ4.
Cycle to cycle jitter
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table AĆ5.
Inhibit input
Delay time to data to clock out
Refer to Td3 and Td4 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
High Z to High Z
34 ns
High Z to High Z
38 ns
Sync output
Level
VOH
Approx. 5 V (into 1 MW)
Approx. 2.5 V (into 50 W)
VOL
Approx. 0 V (into both 1 MW and 50 W)
Delay time from external trigger
input signal
Internal clock, PLL Off. Refer to Td1 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
Trigger Input
57 ns + 1/Fclk (GHz) x Td1 x 57 ns + 2/Fclk (GHz)
Delay time to clock out and
data out
13 ns, Refer to Td2 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
External clock input
Delay time to clock out
36 ns. Refer to Td6 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ7
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ4: Period JItter
Clock frequency
400 MHz (PLL ON)
200 MHz (PLL ON)
Measurement
StdDev
Pk-Pk
StdDev
Pk-Pk
Clock output
6.0 ps
30 ps
6.0 ps
30 ps
CH0 output
50 ps
200 ps
15 ps
65 ps
Table AĆ5: Cycle to Cycle JItter
Clock frequency
AĆ8
400 MHz (PLL ON)
200 MHz (PLL ON)
Measurement
StdDev
Pk-Pk
StdDev
Pk-Pk
Clock output
30 ps
200 ps
12 ps
60 ps
CH0 output
100 ps
340 ps
20 ps
90 ps
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Nominal Traits
This section describes the general characteristics of the DG2030. These are
divided into two main categories: Table A-6 Electrical Characteristics and
Table A-7 Mechanical Characteristics.
Table AĆ6: Nominal traits Ć electrical characteristics
Characteristics
Description
Operation mode
Repeat
Pattern data is repeatedly output. When a sequence is specified, patterns are repeated
according to the sequence order. The extended sequence functions such as trigger wait, event
jump, etc. are ignored in this mode.
Single
Pattern data is output only once. When a sequence is specified, a trigger signal causes to
perform output according to the sequence order.
Step
Pattern data are output based on the clock, not specified by clock source, but generated by
pressing the STEP/EVENT button on the front panel. This mode is the same as Repeat mode
except for the clock.
Enhanced
Pattern data is output completely according to a sequence. The all extended sequence
functions such as trigger wait, event jump, etc. are valid in this mode. This mode is same as
Repeat mode except for the extended sequence functions.
Output pattern
Pattern length
90 to 262144 points
Number of channels
Up to 4 for standard and 8 for option 01
Sequence
Maximum 4000 steps
Number of blocks
Maximum 256
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ9
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ6: Nominal traits Ć electrical characteristics (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
Clock generator
Internal clock
Frequency
0.1 Hz to 409.6 MHz
Resolution
PLL on
7 digits
PLL off
4 digits
Accuracy
PLL on
±0.0001 %, 1 year after shipment from factory
PLL off
±3 %, 1 day after self calibration
Internal trigger generator
Internal trigger rate
Range
1.0 ms to 10.0 s
Resolution
3 digits, 0.1 ms min.
Data and clock out
Connectors
CH0 to CH3, and clock out (BNC connectors at front panel)
CH4 to CH7 (BNC connectors at rear panel)
Output impedance
50 W (typical)
Output voltage
VOH
-1.25 V to +3.50 V (into 50 W)
VOL
-1.50 V to +3.25 V (into 50 W)
Resolution
5 mV (into 50 W)
Voltage swing (VOH - VOL)
0.25 V to 5.00 V (into 50 W)
0.5 V to 10 VpĆp (into 1 MW)
Rise/fall times
Rise and fall time can be varied when the amplitude is within the range from 2 VpĆp to 5 VpĆp
into 50 W.
Variable range
The variable range varies depending on the amplitude. See Figure AĆ1 on page AĆ4. FAST can
be set to rise and/or fall time in this instrument, which means output rising and/or falling edge(s)
are/is the fastest.
DeĆskew
Range
±1 ns
Resolution
10 ps
Delay function
AĆ10
Delay channel
CH0, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, and CH7
(Referenced to clock out)
Delay time
-5 ns to +18 ns
Resolution
20 ps
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ6: Nominal traits Ć electrical characteristics (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
Inhibit function
Mode
Off
Output is always enable.
Internal
Controlled by CH0 signal
External
Controlled by inhibit input signal
Both
Controlled by both CH0 signal and inhibit input signal
Event input
Connector
BNC at rear panel
Threshold level
-5.0 V to +5.0 V, +1.4 V at default
Resolution
0.1 V
Input impedance
1 kW (typical)
Turning point for event jump
57 to 63 clocks before the next block. Refer to Tac1 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
Maximum input voltage
±5 V
Polarity
Positive (rising edge)
Event output
Connector
BNC at rear panel
Level
Vhi
Approx. 5 V into 1 MW
Approx. 2.5 V into 50 W
Vlo
Approx. 0 V into both 1 MW and 50 W
Delay time
48 to 53 clocks before data output change. Refer to Td5 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
Pulse width
45 to 50 clocks. Refer to PW2 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
Impedance
50 W
Inhibit input
Connector
BNC at rear panel
Threshold level
-5.0 V to +5.0 V, +1.4 V at default
Resolution
0.1 V
Input impedance
1 kW (typical)
Maximum input voltage
±5 V
Sync output
Connector
BNC at rear panel
Pulse width
9 or 10 clocks. Refer to PW1 in Figure AĆ2 on page AĆ5.
Impedance
50 W (typical)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ11
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ6: Nominal traits Ć electrical characteristics (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
Trigger input
Connector
BNC at front panel
Threshold level
-5.0 V to +5.0 V, +1.4 V at default
Resolution
0.1 V
Impedance
50 W or 1 kW
Polarity
Positive or Negative
External clock input
Connector
BNC at rear panel
Impedance
50 W terminated to 0.5 V
Display
Display area
Width:
Height:
13.2 cm (5.2 inches)
9.9 cm (3.9 inches)
Resolution
Horizontal:
Vertical:
640 pixels
480 pixels
AC line power
Fuse rating
6A FAST, 250 V, UL 198G ( 3AG )
5A ( T ), 250 V, IEC 127
Table AĆ7: Nominal traits Ć mechanical characteristics
Characteristics
Description
Net weight
Standard
10.3 kg (22.7 lb)
Dimensions
Height
164 mm (6.4 inches) including feet
Width
362 mm (14.3 inches) including handle
Length
491 mm (19.25 inches) including front cover
576 mm (22.2 inches) with handle extended
AĆ12
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix A: Specifications
Certification and Compliances
The certification and compliances for the DG2030 are listed in Table A-8.
Table AĆ8: Certifications and compliances
Category
Standards or description
EC Declaration of Conformity EMC
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:
Australian/New Zealand
declaration of Conformity Ć EMC
EN 55011
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
EN 50081Ć1 Emissions:
EN61000Ć3Ć2
AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions
EN 50082Ć1 Immunity:
EN61000Ć4Ć2
EN61000Ć4Ć3
EN61000Ć4Ć4
EN61000Ć4Ć11
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
Voltage Dips and Interruptions Immunity
Complies with EMC provision of Radio-communications Act per the following standard:
AS/NZS 2064.1/2
EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Communities:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010Ć1/A1:1992
Approvals
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
Complies with the following safety standards:
Installation Category
UL3111-1, First Edition
Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.1010.1Ć92
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
CAT II
Terminals on this product may have different installation (over-voltage) category designations. The
installation categories are:
Category
Examples of products in this category
CAT III
DistributionĆlevel mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this
level is typically in a fixed industrial location.
CAT II
LocalĆlevel mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances,
portable tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cordĆconnected.
CAT I
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
AĆ13
Appendix A: Specifications
Table AĆ8: Certifications and compliances (cont.)
Category
Standards or description
Pollution Degree
A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product.
Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external.
Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 2
Conditions of Approval
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a
temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of
service.
Safety Certifications/Compliances are made for the following conditions:
Altitude (maximum operation): 2000 meters
IEC Characteristics
Equipment type:
Test and Measuring
Installation Category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1)
Safety Class I (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex H)
AĆ14
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
This section describes the operation tests for the DG2030 data generator, and the
procedures for those tests. The operation tests can be divided into two categories.
H
Self Tests.
The DG2030 incorporates a diagnostic system that performs comprehensive
instrument testing. This system confirms that the DG2030 is operating
correctly. The self tests execute quickly and require no special equipment
during execution.
H
Performance Tests.
These tests confirm the operation of the items that are marked with an
asterisk (*) in the guaranteed items in the operating specifications listed in
Appendix A, Performance Characteristics. The equipment listed in Table
B-2 is required to perform these performance tests.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ1
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Before Running the Operation Tests
Perform the following before running the Operation Tests.
Warm up
A 20 minute warm up period is required prior to running the operation tests.
Calibration
The clock calibration must be performed after the warm up period has been
passed. The calibration must be made during operations at least when the
ambient temperature has been changed by ±5 _C from previous calibration.
To perform the clock calibration:
1. Select UTILITY ! Cal ! Execute.
2. Verify whether error have occurred or not in the screen.
File Loading
The performance check disk provided with the DG2030 includes the files listed
in Table B-1. The specified file must be loaded into the DG2030 for each
operation test item. These files include pattern data and setup information.
Table BĆ1: Performance check disk's file list
File name
Operation test
TP1CLK.PDA
Internal clock frequency
TP2EXCLK.PDA
External clock input
TP3PG.PDA
Sequence and digital output
TP5EV52.PDA
Event input
TP6INH.PDA
Inhibit function
TP7LVL.PDA
Data output voltage level
TP8PULSE.PDA
Clock output amplitude and delay time
TP9ABBE.PDA
Aberration
Use the following procedure to load the file required by a performance test into
the instrument.
1. Insert the performance check disk into the DG2030’s floppy disk drive.
2. Select EDIT ! File ! Load Data & Setup.
3. Select the required file using the general purpose knob.
4. Select OK from the sub menu.
BĆ2
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Required Equipment
Table B-2 lists the equipment required for the performance tests.
Table BĆ2: Required equipment
Item
No.
Required precision
Recommended equipment
Frequency counter
1
Frequency range: 0.1 Hz to 400 MHz
Precision: 7 digits or higher
ANRITSU MF 1603A
Digital multi-meter
1
DC voltage range: ±10 V
Precision: 0.01 V
Tektronix DM2510
Performance check disk
1
Oscilloscope
1
Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher
Tektronix TDS784A
Function generator
1
Amplitude: 4 V, offset: 2 V
(50 W termination),
Frequency: 1 MHz or higher
Tektronix AFG2020
BNC cable
5
Impedance: 50 W
Length: 24 inches
Tektronix part no. 012Ć1342Ć00
Precision 50 W termination
1
Impedance: 50 W (0.1 %)
Tektronix part no. 011Ć0129Ć00
BNC T dual input adapter
1
Tektronix part no. 103Ć0030Ć00
NĆtoĆBNC adapter
1
Tektronix part no. 103Ć0045Ć00
BNCĆdualĆbanana adapter
1
Tektronix part no. 103Ć0090Ć00
Tektronix part no. 063Ć2922ĆXX
(provided with the DG2030)
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ3
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Test Procedure Notes
The following conventions are used in this section for describing the self tests
and performance tests.
H
H
The test items are described in the following order.
H
Characteristic tested
H
Required equipment
H
Connections
H
Test procedure
The test procedure is presented in order starting with step 1, and progresses
through the end of the procedure. Tables such as the one shown below appear
in these steps. For these steps, press the buttons in the order shown in the
table, either from left to right or from top to bottom, to select the required
menu item. For pop up menus, use the general purpose knob to select items
from the menu list. Operations such as operation 6 do not involve pressing
the buttons shown in the row above, but rather are descriptions of operations
to be performed. Figure B-1 shows the buttons used and the menu layout.
Menu button
Bottom button
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Operation 5
Operation 6 (e.g., insert a disk in the disk drive.)
Operation 7
Popup Menu
Side Menu
General Purpose Knob
Front Panel Button
Bottom Menu
Menu Button
Bottom Button
Side Button
Figure BĆ1: Operating buttons and menu layout
BĆ4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Self Tests
Execute the DG2030 self tests and confirm that no errors occurred.
1. Press the required buttons in the following order. Selecting All from the
Type side button causes the instrument to run the self-test on all test items.
Menu button
Bottom button
UTILITY
Diag
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Type (Select All)
Execute
2. Confirm that all self tests passed by checking the Status display area shown
in Figure B-2.
Figure BĆ2: Diagnostics menu
If Fail is listed in the Status display area, an error code will be displayed in
the Comment column. See Table B-3 for the meanings of the error codes.
NOTE. Contact your Tektronix sales representative if an error occurs.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ5
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Table BĆ3: Error codes
BĆ6
Error code
Error meaning
Failed component
1XX
CPU diagnostics error
A6 CPU board
2XX
Display diagnostics error
A6 CPU board
3XX
Front panel diagnostics error
A12 Key board
4XX
Clock diagnostics / calibration error
A30 Clock board
5XX
Trigger diagnostics / calibration error
A30 Clock board
6XX
Sequence memory error
A50 PG&Output board
7XX
Pattern memory diagnostics error
A50 PG&Output board
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Performance Tests
The performance test for the DG2030 must be performed in the following order.
Internal Clock Frequency
H
Internal clock frequency
H
External clock input
H
Sequence & digital output
H
Inhibit function
H
Output level, amplitude, rise time and fall time accuracies
H
Delay time accuracy
This test confirms the frequency accuracy of the DG2030 internal clock.
With the PLL circuit on: Clock frequency ±0.0001 %
With the PLL circuit off: Clock frequency ±3 %
Equipment Required
Frequency counter
BNC cable
50 W termination
NĆtoĆBNC adapter
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the clock output from the DG2030 front panel to the
frequency counter input (INPUT B) through the N-to-BNC adapter with the
BNC cable.
DG2030 Front Panel
Clock Output
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
NĆtoĆBNC adapter
Figure BĆ3: Frequency measurement connections
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ7
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Setup. Set the frequency counter to frequency measurement mode.
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP1CLK.PDA test pattern file from the performance check disk.
When the file is loaded, the DG2030 clock frequency will be set to 400 MHz
internally and the PLL circuit will be turned on.
The following steps check the clock frequency accuracy with the PLL circuit on
and the internal clock frequency set to 400 MHz.
2. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
3. Set the counter trigger to an appropriate value and confirm that the counter
displays a frequency in the range 399.9996 to 400.0004 MHz.
The following steps check the clock frequency precision with the PLL circuit on
and the internal clock frequency set to 200.1 MHz, 200 kHz and 100.0 mHz.
4. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 clock frequency to
200.1 MHz.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Clock
Pop up menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Int FREQ
200.1
MHz/ms
5. Set the counter trigger to an appropriate value, and confirm that the counter
displays a frequency in the range 200.0998 MHz to 200.1002 MHz.
6. Change the frequency counter input to INPUT A through the 50 W termination with the BNC cable.
7. Set the DG2030 clock frequency to 200 kHz.
8. Set the counter trigger to an appropriate value, and confirm that counter
displays a frequency in the range 199.9998 kHz to 200.0002 kHz.
9. Set the DG2030 clock frequency to 100 mHz.
10. Set the frequency counter to period measurement mode.
11. Set the counter trigger to an appropriate value, and confirm that the counter
displays a frequency in the range 99.9999 mHz to 100.0001 mHz.
BĆ8
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check the clock frequency accuracy with the PLL circuit off
and the internal clock frequency set to 400 MHz, 200 kHz and 100.0 mHz.
12. Press the following buttons to turn the PLL circuit off.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Clock
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
PLL (Set to Off)
13. Set the internal clock frequency to 400 MHz, 200 kHz, and 100.0 mHz, and
confirm that the frequencies and periods measured by the frequency counter
fall within the ranges shown in Table B-4.
Table BĆ4: Internal clock frequency precision (PLL off)
Internal clock frequencies
Clock frequency ranges
400.0 MHz
388 MHz 412 MHz
200.0 kHz
194 kHz 206 kHz
100.0 mHz (10.0 s)
97 mHz 103 mHz
14. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ9
Appendix B: Performance Verification
External Clock Input
This test confirms external clock input operation. Confirm that the clock signal is
output from the CLOCK OUT connector when a square wave signal with a
frequency of 1 MHz and an amplitude of 1 V (VIH > 0.7 V, VIL < 0.3 V) is input
as an external clock signal.
Equipment Required
Oscilloscope
Function generator
Two BNC cables
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the clock output from the DG2030 front panel to the
oscilloscope CH1 input with an BNC cable. Connect the function generator
output to the DG2030 rear panel clock input with the other BNC cable.
AFG2020 Front Panel
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX INPUT:
CLOCK connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
DG2030 Front Panel
TDS784A Front Panel
Clock Output
CH1 Input
BNC Cable
Figure BĆ4: External clock input connections
BĆ10
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Setup.
H
Oscilloscope
Displayed channel
Vertical axis . . . . .
Horizontal axis . . .
Trigger mode . . . .
Trigger level . . . . .
Input coupling . . . .
Input impedance . .
H
CH1
500 mV/div
1 ms/div
Auto
500 mV
DC
50 W
Function generator
Waveform . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . .
Amplitude . . . . . . .
Offset . . . . . . . . . .
Square wave
1 MHz
1 V (50 W termination)
500 mV (50 W termination)
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP2EXCLK.PDA test pattern file from the performance check
disk.
2. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
3. Confirm that the clock pulse waveform can be observed on the oscilloscope.
4. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ11
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Sequence & Digital Output
This test confirms that pattern data is output from the DG2030 output channel
ports (CH0 through CH7) in various run modes.
Equipment Required
Oscilloscope
Function generator
Five BNC cables
BNC T adapter
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the clock output from the DG2030 front panel to the
oscilloscope CH1 input with an BNC cable. Connect the function generator
output to the DG2030 rear panel event input with the other BNC cable.
Next, using the BNC cables, connect the CH0 signal output from the DG2030 to
the oscilloscope CH2 input, the event output from the DG2030 rear panel to the
oscilloscope CH3 input, and the sync output from the DG2030 rear panel to the
oscilloscope CH4 input. See Figure B-5 for those connection
AFG2020 Front Panel
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX INPUT:
EVENT connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
DG2030 Front Panel
TDS784A Front Panel
Clock Output
CH0
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX OUTPUT:
SYNC connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
CH1
BNC Cable
CH2
CH3
CH4
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX OUTPUT:
EVENT connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
Figure BĆ5: Sequence & digital output connections #1
BĆ12
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Setup.
H
Oscilloscope
Displayed channel CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4
Vertical axis . . . . . 1 V/div for CH1 and CH2
5 V/div for CH3 and CH4
Horizontal axis . . . 400 ns/div
Record length . . . . 5000
Acquire mode . . . . Peak Detect
Single acquisition sequence (Stop After menu)
Trigger mode . . . . Auto
Trigger level . . . . . 2 V
Trigger source . . . . CH4
Trigger position . . 3 %
Input coupling . . . . DC
Input impedance . . 50 W for CH1 and CH2
1 MW for CH3 and CH4
H
Function generator
Waveform . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . .
Amplitude . . . . . . .
Offset . . . . . . . . . .
Square wave
500 kHz
1 V (50 W termination))
500 mV
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP3PG.PDA test pattern file from the performance check disk.
The following steps check the pattern data output operation in Repeat run mode.
2. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 run mode to Repeat.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Run Mode
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Repeat
3. Run the oscilloscope for acquisition.
4. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
5. Confirm that the data pattern shown in Figure B-6 appears on the oscilloscope.
6. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ13
Appendix B: Performance Verification
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 4
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 3
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 4
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 3
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
Figure BĆ6: Repeat mode timing chart
The following steps check the pattern data output operation in Single run mode.
7. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 run mode to Single.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Run Mode
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Single
8. Run the oscilloscope so that the oscilloscope is waiting for a trigger event.
9. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
10. Confirm that the CH0 output data pattern as shown in Figure B-7 appears on
the oscilloscope screen once every time the FORCE TRIGGER button on
the DG2030 front panel is pressed.
11. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
BĆ14
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check the pattern data output operation in Step run mode.
12. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 run mode to Step.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Run Mode
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Step
13. Cancel the single acquisition mode setting in the oscilloscope, and then start
acquisition.
This can be made by selecting SHIFT + ACQUIRE (front panel ! Stop
After (bottom) ! Run/Stop button only (side) for the TDS784A, and then
by pressing the RUN/STOP button.
14. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
15. One bit appears in the CH0 output each time the STEP/EVENT button on
the DG2030 front panel is pressed. Press the STEP/EVENT button six
times and confirm that the bit pattern: 0 1 0 1 0 1, one bit for every pressing
that button, appears.
16. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ15
Appendix B: Performance Verification
BLOCK 1
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
BLOCK 2
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
BLOCK 3
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
BLOCK 4
CLOCK OUT
CH0
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
Figure BĆ7: Single and step mode timing chart
BĆ16
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check the digital pattern output, event output and sync
output in Enhanced run mode.
17. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 run mode to Enhanced.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Run Mode
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Enhanced
18. Change the oscilloscope trigger source to CH3 and trigger position to 50 %.
19. Press the following buttons to set the trigger parameters.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Source
(Set to Int)
Interval
State (Set to On)
Time
10
kHz/ms/mV
20. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
21. Confirm the following points from the oscilloscope screen:
H
The output patterns in the CH0 to CH3 correctly appear as shown in
Figure B-8.
Change the CH0 cable connection to, in turn, from CH1 to CH3 cable
connection when you observe the outputs from CH1 to CH3.
H
The output patterns in the CH4 to CH7 correctly appear as shown in
Figure B-8 if the option 01 has been installed.
Change the CH3 cable connection to, in turn, from CH4 to CH7 cable
connection on the rear panel when you observe the outputs from CH4 to
CH7.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ17
Appendix B: Performance Verification
H
The event signal pattern in the AUX OUTPUT: EVENT outputs
correctly, and the event high and low levels are nearly 5 V and 0 V,
respectively.
H
The sync signal pattern in the AUX OUTPUT: SYNC outputs correctly,
and the sync high and low levels are nearly 5 V and 0 V, respectively.
H
Change the oscilloscope horizontal setting to 2 ms/div, and confirm that
the trigger wait function operates correctly.
Trigger event is generated in every 10 ms. Confirm that the block pattern
(BLOCK 1) waits for the trigger event and then outputs.
22. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 clock frequency to
409.6 MHz.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Clock
Pop up menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Int FREQ
409.6
MHz/ms
23. Change the oscilloscope horizontal axis setting to 10 ns/div.
24. Confirm that the data pattern in the CH0 to CH3 (also CH4 to CH7 if the
option 01 has been installed), EVENT OUT and SYNC OUT can be
observed as shown in Figure B-8 on the oscilloscope. Change the channel
output connection as needed.
BĆ18
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
BLOCK 1
CLOCK OUT
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
BLOCK 2
CLOCK OUT
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
EVENT OUT
SYNC OUT
Figure BĆ8: Enhanced timing chart
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ19
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check that the DG2030 internal trigger source generates a
1 ms trigger event every 10 seconds.
25. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger interval to 1 ms.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Interval
State (Set to On)
Time
1
MHz/ms
26. Change the frequency settings in the function generator to 1 MHz.
27. Change the oscilloscope horizontal setting to 200 ns/div.
28. Confirm that trigger event is generated in every 1 ms with the oscilloscope
screen.
This can be made by confirming that output signal appears on the oscilloscope CH2 in every 1 ms.
29. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger interval to 10 s.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Interval
State (Set to On)
Time
10
Hz/s/V
30. Stop acquisition in the oscilloscope, and then change the oscilloscope
settings to:
Horizontal axis . . . 5 s/div
Record length . . . . 500
Acquisition mode . Single Acquisition Sequence
(Stop After menu)
Trigger source . . . . CH3
BĆ20
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
31. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
32. Confirm that there is a 1 ms trigger event every 10 seconds on the oscilloscope channel 2 display.
33. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger interval to 10 ms.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Interval
State (Set to On)
Time
10
kHz/ms/mV
34. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
The following steps check that the DG2030 turns off the external trigger signal.
35. Load the TP5EV52.PDA test pattern file from the performance check disk.
36. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 clock frequency to 400 MHz.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Clock
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Int FREQ
4,0,0,MHz/ms
37. Press the following buttons to turn off the DG2030 trigger interval.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Interval
State (Set to Off)
38. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
39. Make sure that the message Waiting for Trigger is displayed at the upper
right part of the DG2030 screen and the trigger event no longer occurs.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ21
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check the external trigger signal.
40. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger source to Ext.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Source
(Set to Ext)
41. Change the connection as follows.
a. Disconnect the BNC cable connecting between the DG2030 rear panel
EVENT OUTPUT connector and the oscilloscope CH3 input connector.
b. Disconnect the BNC cable connecting between the DG2030 rear panel
EVENT INPUT connector and the function generator output connector.
c. Connect a BNC T adaptor to the function generator output connector.
And using two BNC cables, connect from the BNC T adaptor to the
DG2030 front panel TRIGGER INPUT connector, other side BNC T
adaptor to the oscilloscope CH3 input connector.
d. Disconnect the BNC cable from the DG2030 front panel CH3 connector
and re–connect it to CH2 connector. (Disconnect the BNC cable from the
DG2030 front panel CH7 connector and re–connect it to CH2 connector
if the option 01 has been installed.)
e. Disconnect the BNC cable from the DG2030 front panel CLOCK OUT
connector and re–connect it to CH0 connector.
See Figure B-9.
BĆ22
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
AFG2020 Front Panel
BNC Cable
BNC T adapter
BNC Cable
TDS784A Front Panel
Ă
CH0 CH1
CH2
Trigger Input
CH1
BNC Cable
CH2
CH3
CH4
BNC Cable
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX OUTPUT:
SYNC connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
Figure BĆ9: Sequence & digital output connections #3
42. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger source to 50 W.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Impedance
(Set to 50 W)
43. Set the frequency setting in the function generator to 500 kHz.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ23
Appendix B: Performance Verification
44. Set the oscilloscope settings to:
Horizontal axis . . .
Record length . . . .
Vertical axis . . . . .
Acquisition mode .
Input impedance . .
Trigger level . . . . .
Trigger source . . . .
400 ns/div
5000
1 V/div (for CH3 input)
Run/Stop button only (Stop After menu)
50 W (for CH3 input)
500 mV
CH4
45. Observe the displayed waveform patterns on the oscilloscope screen, confirm
that the the trigger event synchronizes with the rising edge of the input pulse.
Trigger event can be recognized by observing the CH1 output signal from
the DG2030 on oscilloscope CH1 input.
46. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 trigger slope to Negative.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Trigger
Pop up menu
Front panel
button
Side button
Slope
(Set to Negative)
47. On the oscilloscope screen, confirm that the trigger event occurs synchronizing with the falling edge of the input pulse.
48. Press the START/STOP button on the DG2030 front panel to stop output
(the button LED goes off).
BĆ24
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Inhibit Function
This test confirms the inhibit function of the DG2030 outputs.
Equipment Required
Oscilloscope
Three BNC cables
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the CH1 output from the DG2030 front panel to the inhibit
input on the DG2030 rear panel using the BNC cable. Connect the DG2030 front
panel CH2 output to the oscilloscope CH1 input. Connect the sync output from
the DG2030 rear panel to the oscilloscope CH4 input. See Figure B-10.
BNC Cable: connect the CH1 OUT on the
DG2030 front panel connector to the AUX INPUT:
INHIBIT connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
DG2030 Front Panel
TDS784A Front Panel
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH4
BNC Cable
BNC Cable: connect to the AUX OUTPUT:
SYNC connector on the DG2030 rear panel.
Figure BĆ10: Inhibit function test connection
Setup.
H
Oscilloscope
Input coupling . . . .
Input impedance . .
Trigger source . . . .
Trigger mode . . . .
Trigger level . . . . .
DC
50 W
CH4
Auto
2V
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ25
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP6INH.PDA test pattern file from the performance check disk.
2. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
3. Confirm that the pulse pattern waveform with 5 MHz of frequency, +3 V of
high voltage level and 0 V of low voltage level is continuously output from
the DG2030 CH2 output.
NOTE. The first pulse, which has +3 V of high voltage level, after the sync signal
went to high level state will have narrower pulse width than other pulses. This is
because that the delay time of the external inhibit signal is larger than that of the
internal inhibit signal.
4. Change the BNC cable connection from the DG2030 front panel CH2 to the
DG2030 CH3 connector, and then confirm the CH3 output waveform as was
done in step 3.
When the option 01 has been installed, confirm the output waveforms from
CH4 through CH7 as changing the BNC cable connection.
5. Change the BNC cable connection from the DG2030 CH3 (or CH7)
connector to the DG2030 CH0 connector.
6. Confirm that the DG2030 outputs twenty-five 5 MHz pulses with a high
value of +3 V and a low value of –1 V, followed by twenty-five 5 MHz
pulses with a high value of 0 V and a low value of –1 V. These two
waveform patterns are continuously and repeatedly output from CH0.
7. Change the BNC cable connection from the DG2030 front panel CH1
connector to the DG2030 CH2 connector, and then the CH0 to CH1
connector.
8. Confirm that the DG2030 outputs twenty-five 5 MHz pulses with a high
value of 0 V and a low value of –1 V, followed by twenty-five 5 MHz
pulses with a high value of +3 V and a low value of –1 V. These two
waveform patterns are continuously and repeatedly output from CH1.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from the DG2030 CH1 output to clock
output on the front panel.
BĆ26
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
10. Set the inhibit control for the CH2 output channel to OFF as following
procedures:
Menu button
Bottom button
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
SETUP
Select CH2 with the general purpose knob.
Output
Condition
Control
Condition
Change Inhibit
Control
OFF
OK
11. Confirm that the clock output voltage level is almost 0 V.
12. Disconnect the BNC cable from the inhibit input on the DG2030 rear panel.
13. Confirm that the pulses with 10 MHz of frequency, +3 V of high voltage
level and –1 V of low voltage level are continuously output from the
DG2030 clock output.
14. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ27
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Output Level, Amplitude,
Rise Time and Fall Time
Accuracy
This test confirms the output level, amplitude, rise time and fall time accuracies
of the DG2030 output.
Variable voltage levels for the amplitude
High level: –1.25 V to +3.50 V into 50 W
Low level: –1.50 V to +3.25 V into 50 W
Output Level (CH0 to CH7)
Accuracy: ±(3 % of setting) ±50 mV into 50 W
Output Amplitude (CLOCK OUT)
Accuracy: ±(5 % of setting) ±50 mV into 50 W
Rise / Fall Times
Accuracy: ±(10 % of setting) ±500 ps
Equipment Required
Digital multi-meter (DMM)
Oscilloscope
BNC cable
Precision 50 W termination
BNC to dual banana adapter
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the CH0 output from the DG2030 front panel to the digital
multi–meter input using the BNC cable, precision 50 W termination and BNC to
dual banana adapter as shown in Figure B-11.
DG2030 Front Panel
Digital Multi-meter
Precision 50 W
termination &
BNCĆtoĆdual
banana adapter
BNC Cable
Figure BĆ11: Output level measurement connections
BĆ28
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Setup.
H
Digital multi–meter
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCV
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
H
Oscilloscope
Vertical axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal axis . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger source . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display channel . . . . . . . . . . .
Input coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . .
Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Ref. (Rise/Fall Times) . .
Low Ref (Rise/Fall Times) . . .
500 mV/div
2 ns/div
CH1
750 mV
CH1
DC
50 W
Full
80 %
20 %
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP7LVL.PDA test pattern file from the performance check disk.
The following steps check the high voltage levels on all output channels.
2. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 high and low voltage levels.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Level Condition
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Move the cursor to CH0 with the general purpose knob.
High
-1.25
ENTER
Low
-1.50
ENTER
Note that the low level is automatically set to –1.50 V when the high level
has been set to –1.25 V.
3. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button’s LED
indicator lights.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ29
Appendix B: Performance Verification
4. Confirm the high voltage level as following procedures:
a. Press the STEP/EVENT button on the DG2030 front panel once to
output high voltage level.
b. Set the high and low voltage levels to the values indicated in Table B-5,
and confirm that the digital multi–meter reading for each high voltage
level setting falls within the specified voltage range.
c. Repeat step b for all high and low voltage settings in Table B-5.
d. Repeat steps from a to c for all output channels from CH0 to CH3 (or to
CH7 if the option 01 has been installed) as changing the BNC cable
connection.
Table BĆ5: High level output voltage accuracy
Settings
High voltage level (V)
Low voltage level (V)
High level output voltage ranges
-1.25
-1.50
-1.337 V to -1.163 V
0
-1.50
-0.050 V to +0.050 V
+1.00
-1.50
+0.920 V to +1.080 V
+2.00
-1.50
+1.89 V to +2.11 V
+3.50
-1.50
+3.35 V to +3.65 V
5. Confirm the low voltage level as following procedures:
a. Press the STEP/EVENT button on the DG2030 front panel once to
output low voltage level.
b. Set the low and high voltage levels to the values as shown in Table B-6,
and confirm that the digital multi–meter reading for each voltage setting
falls within the specified voltage range.
c. Repeat step b for all high and low voltage settings in Table B-6.
d. Repeat steps from a to c for all output channels from CH0 to CH3 (or to
CH7 if the option 01 has been installed) as changing the BNC cable
connection.
BĆ30
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
Table BĆ6: Low level output voltage accuracy
Settings
Low voltage level (V)
High voltage level (V)
Low level output voltage ranges
-1.50
+3.50
-1.595 V to -1.405 V
0
+3.50
-0.050 V to +0.050 V
+1.00
+3.50
+0.920 V to +1.080 V
+2.00
+3.50
+1.89 V to +2.11 V
+3.25
+3.50
+3.11 V to +3.39 V
The following steps check the clock output amplitude accuracy.
6. Disconnect the BNC cable from both the digital multi–meter input and the
DG2030. And then connect the clock output to the oscilloscope CH1 input
as shown in Figure B-12.
7. Load the TP8PULSE.PDA test pattern file from the performance check
disk.
8. Using the oscilloscope measurement functions, perform the measurements
under the low and high voltage level settings shown in Table B-7, and
confirm that the amplitude for each voltage setting is within the specified
range.
Table BĆ7: Output amplitude accuracy
Settings
Low voltage level (V)
High voltage level (V)
Amplitude ranges
-1.50
-1.25
0.188 V to 0.312 V
-1.50
-0.50
0.90 V to 1.10 V
-1.50
+0.50
1.85 V to 2.15 V
-1.50
+1.50
2.80 V to 3.20 V
-1.50
+2.50
3.75 V to 4.25 V
-1.50
+3.50
4.70 V to 5.30 V
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ31
Appendix B: Performance Verification
The following steps check the rise and fall time accuracies for the clock output
and data outputs on all channels.
9. Using the oscilloscope measurement functions, perform the clock signal rise
and fall time measurements under the low and high voltage level, and rise
and fall time settings indicated in Table B-8, and confirm that the measurement results are within the specified range.
Set the oscilloscope trigger slope to Positive for observing the pulse rising
slope, and to Negative for the pulse falling slope.
Table BĆ8: Rise and fall time accuracies
Voltage settings
BĆ32
Low level
High level
-1.50 V
+0.50 V
-1.50 V
+1.50 V
-1.50 V
+2.50 V
-1.50 V
+3.50 V
Rise/fall times
Rise/fall time ranges
2.24 ns
1.52 ns to 2.96 ns
3.10 ns
2.29 ns to 3.91 ns
3.42 ns
2.58 ns to 4.26 ns
4.72 ns
3.75 ns to 5.69 ns
4.58 ns
3.63 ns to 5.53 ns
6.36 ns
5.23 ns to 7.49 ns
5.74 ns
4.67 ns to 6.81 ns
8.00 ns
6.70 ns to 9.30 ns
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
10. Change the BNC cable connection from the clock output to CH0 through
CH3 (or CH7 for option 01) in turn, and repeat step 9 for each of these
channels. Confirm the rise and fall times are within the specified ranges.
11. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 Front Panel
TDS784A Front Panel
Clock Output
BNC Cable
CH1 Input
Figure BĆ12: Output amplitude, rise time and fall time measurement connection
Delay Time Accuracy
This test confirms the delay time accuracy referenced to the clock output on each
channel and the channel skew of the DG2030.
Accuracy: ±(3 % of setting) ±500 ps
±60 ps | Ambient temperature (_C) * 25 |
Equipment Required
Oscilloscope
Two BNC cables
Performance check disk
Connections. Connect the clock and CH0 outputs from the DG2030 front panel
to the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 inputs, respectively, using the BNC cables.
See Figure B-13.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ33
Appendix B: Performance Verification
DG2030 Front Panel
TDS784A Front Panel
Clock Output
CH1
CH0
CH2
BNC Cables
Figure BĆ13: Delay time measurement connections
Setup.
H
Oscilloscope
Displayed channel
Vertical axis . . . . .
Horizontal axis . . .
Trigger mode . . . .
Trigger source . . . .
Trigger level . . . . .
Input coupling . . . .
Input impedance . .
CH1 and CH2
500 mV/div
5 ns/div
Auto
CH1
750 mV
DC
50 W
Characteristics Confirmation Procedure.
1. Load the TP8PULSE.PDA test pattern file from the performance check
disk.
2. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel so that the button LED
indicator turns on.
3. Press the following buttons to set the DG2030 CH0 output delay time to
–5.00 n.
Menu button
Bottom button
SETUP
Timing
Condition
Pop up menu
Side button
Front panel
button
Move the cursor to CH0 with the general purpose knob.
Delay
BĆ34
-5.0
ENTER
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix B: Performance Verification
4. Set the delay time to –5.00 ns, 0.00 ns, +5.00 ns, +10.00 ns, +15.00 ns and
+18.00 ns in turn. Perform the delay time measurement for each delay time
setting with the oscilloscope. Confirm that the data output delay times
referenced to the clock signal are within the specified range for each of these
delay time settings.
5. Change the BNC cable connection from the CH0 to CH1 through CH3 for
standard (or CH7 for option 01) in turn and repeat step 4 for each of these
channels.
6. From above measurement results at 0.00 ns delay time setting on all output
channels, confirm that the delay time differences between two adjacent
channels is within the range from –300 ps to +300 ps.
7. Press the START/STOP button on the front panel to stop data output (the
button’s LED goes off).
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
BĆ35
Appendix B: Performance Verification
BĆ36
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
This appendix covers the following items.
H
Repackaging for Shipment
H
Inspection and Cleaning
H
Factory Settings
H
Conversion Table Examples
Repackaging for Shipment
If this instrument is shipped by commercial transportation, use the original
packaging material. Unpack the instrument carefully from its shipping container
so that the carton and packaging material can be used for repackaging.
If the original packaging is unfit for use or is not available, repackage the
instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having inside dimensions at
least six inches greater than the instrument dimensions and having a carton
test strength of at least 125 kg (275 pounds).
2. If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center for repair or
calibration, attach a tag to the instrument showing the following: the owner
of the instrument (with address), the name of a person at your firm who may
be contacted if additional information is needed, the complete instrument
type and serial number, and a description of the service required.
3. Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent to protect the
outside finish and prevent entry of packing materials into the instrument.
4. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane
foam between the carton and the instrument, allowing for three inches of
padding on each side (including top and bottom).
5. Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an industrial stapler.
6. Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and your return address on
the carton in one or more prominent locations.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
CĆ1
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Inspection and Cleaning Procedures
Inspect and clean the instrument as often as operating conditions require. The
collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and breakdown. Dirt acts as
an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. Dirt also provides an
electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure, especially under
high-humidity conditions.
CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the
plastics used in this instrument. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use a ethyl alcohol solution as a cleaner
and rinse with deionized water.
Avoid the use of high pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the
interior of this instrument. (High pressure air can cause ESD.) Instead, use low
pressure compressed air (about 9 psi).
Inspection Ċ Exterior
Using Table C-1 as a guide, inspect the outside of the instrument for damage,
wear, and missing parts. You should thoroughly check instruments that appear to
have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and performance. Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to
further damage to the instrument.
Table CĆ1: External inspection check list
Item
Inspect for
Repair action
Cabinet, front panel, and cover
Cracks, scratches, deformations, damaged
hardware or gaskets
Replace defective module
FrontĆpanel knobs
Missing, damaged, or loose knobs
Repair or replace missing or defective knobs
Connectors
Broken shells, cracked insulation, and
deformed contacts. Dirt in connectors
Replace defective modules. Clear or wash out
dirt
Carrying handle and cabinet feet
Correct operation
Replace defective module
Accessories
Missing items or parts of items, bent pins,
broken or frayed cables, and damaged
connectors
Replace damaged or missing items, frayed
cables, and defective modules
CĆ2
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Cleaning Procedure Ċ
Exterior
WARNING. To avoid injury or death, unplug the power cord from line voltage
before cleaning the instrument. To avoid getting moisture inside the instrument
during external cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint-free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose
detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth dampened with either ethyl
alcohol or, preferably, a gentle, general purpose detergent-and-water solution.
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
CĆ3
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Factory Settings
When Reset to Factory is selected from the UTILITY System menu, this
instrument’s parameters are reset to the values they had when leaving the factory.
Table C-2 lists these factory settings.
Table CĆ2: Factory settings
SETUP menu
Output Condition
Event Level
1.4 V
Event
Enable
Inhibit Level
1.4 V
Inhibit Control
(Change Inhibit Control)
OFF
Level Condition
High
1.5 V (into 50 W) (for all channels)
Low
0.0 V (for all channels)
Z on Stop
On
Timing Condition
(for all channels)
Rise
FAST
Fall
FAST
Delay
0.0 ns
Run Mode
Run mode
Repeat
Update
Auto
Trigger
Slope
Positive
Level
1.4 V
Impedance
1 kW
Source
Ext
Interval ! State
Off
Interval ! Time
10.0 s
Source
Int
Int FREQ
100.00 MHz
Ext FREQ
100.00 MHz
PLL
On
Clock
CĆ4
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Table CĆ2: Factory settings (Cont.)
UTILITY menu
Mass Memory
Special ! Catalog Order
NAME1
Display
Clock
Off
Brightness
70%
Dimmer
Off
Hardcopy
Format
BMP
Port
DISK
System
Power up Pause
On
Type
All
Diag
DeĆskew
Skew
0.0 ns (for all channels)
The following menu items are not affected by Reset to Factory.
H
Menu items in the EDIT menu
H
The following SETUP items
Group number
Channel allocation
However, when Security Immediate item is selected in the UTILITY
System menu, the above items are reset.
H
The following UTILITY items
Remote Port
GPIB operation mode and address
Serial parameters
Date/Time
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
CĆ5
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Conversion Table Examples
Using the code conversion table, bit pattern can be converted to another.
Figure C-1 shows an image how the code conversion table is used.
Data bits being
looked up
Data bits already looked up
Data bits that will be looked up
Source data bit pattern
When the data bits being looked up are
patternĆmatched to the data bits specified by PAST,
CURRENT, NEXT and PAST OUTPUT, corresponding
output code is written to the destination.
PAST CURRENT NEXT PAST OUTPUT
OUTPUT CODE
Code Conversion Table
Destination data bit pattern
Data bits already written after converted
Data bits about
being written
Data bits that will be written
after converted
Figure CĆ1: Conversion image example
CĆ6
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
Examples
In following examples, data bits to be written in the tables are introduced. And
input and output data bit pattern example is following each table.
H
Inverting bit of the NRZ data.
Past
Current
Next
P.OUT
Output code
0
1
1
0
Example
H
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
Converting NRZ data to NRZI.
Past
Current
Next
P.OUT
Output code
1
0 1
1
1 0
0
0 0
0
1 1
Example
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
CĆ7
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
H
Converting NRZ data to NRZI. Two bit are generated for each input bit.
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
1
0 01
1
1 10
0
0 00
0
1 11
Example
H
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
00
01
11
11
10
01
11
11
11
Converting NRZ data to FM. Two bit are generated for each input bit.
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
0
0 11
0
1 00
1
0 10
1
1 01
Example
CĆ8
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
11
01
00
11
01
01
00
11
00
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
H
Converting NRZ data to BI-PHASE. Two bit are generated for each input
bit.
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
0
01
1
10
Example
H
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
01
10
01
01
10
10
01
01
01
Converting NRZ data to RZ. Two bit are generated for each input bit.
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
0
00
1
10
Example
H
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
00
10
00
00
10
10
00
00
00
Output bit is always set to 1 when input bit changes from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1.
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
0 1
1
1 0
1
1
0
0
0
Example
Input
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Output
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
CĆ9
Appendix C: Miscellaneous
H
Converting NRZ data to 1-7 RLL (Run-length Limited Codes).
Past
Current
Next
P. OUT
Output code
0000
1
100000
0000
0
011111
0001
00
111111
0001
01
111111
0001
10
000000
0001
11
000000
0010
01
111110
0010
10
000001
0010
00
111110
0010
11
000001
0011
1
100001
0011
0
011110
01
1
100
01
0
011
10
01
111
10
10
000
10
00
111
10
11
000
11
01
110
11
10
001
11
00
110
11
11
001
0
0
1
1
Example
Input
01
10
11
0010
Output
011
000
110
000001 111
CĆ10
10
0011
11
100001 110
0001
0011
000000 011110
10
0000
000
011111
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Index
A
CLEAR MENU Button, 2-2
Clear Message Area, 3-93
Clock, 3-91
CLOCK IN Connector, 2-4
Clock Menu, 3-81
CLOCK OUT, 2-3
Clock Pattern, 3-43
Clock Unit, 2-9
Configure, 3-95
Connectors, inspection of, C-2
Control Condition, 3-70
Conversion Table Examples, C-6
Copy, 3-32, 3-86
Copy or Delete, 3-86
CPU Unit, 2-9
Creating Standard Pattern Data, 3-41
CURSOR Button, 2-3
Cut, 3-32
Accessories, 1-4
inspection of, C-2
Add block delimiter here, 3-26
Add Group, 3-66
Address, 3-95
Amplitude, Rise/Fall, Output Level, Performance
Tests, B-28
Area cursor, 2-24
Arrow Buttons, 2-3
Assign Condition, 3-69
B
Basic Hardware Structure, 2-8
Basic Menu Operation, 2-15
Basic Operation Examples, 2-31
Before Starting Example, 2-32
Operating Procedure Sequences, 2-32
Required Equipment, 2-31
Baudrate, 3-96
Bezel buttons, 2-2
Binary display, 2-22
Binary down counter, 3-41
Binary up counter, 3-41
Bit Operation, 3-50
Block delimiter, 2-11
Block division, 2-11
Block Menu, 3-25
Block Relative Cursor Movement, 3-25
Blocks, 2-12
Bottom Menu, 2-17
Brightness, 3-91
D
Data Bits, 3-96
Data structure overview, 2-10
Date/Time, 3-97
De–skew Menu, 3-98
Delay, 3-75
Delay Time, Performance Tests, B-33
Delete, 3-86
Delete All, 3-87
Delete current block delimiter, 3-27
Delete Group, 3-67
Delete Key, 2-3
Delete sequence step, 3-57
Diag Menu, 3-99
Digital Output, Sequence, Performance Tests, B-12
Dimmer, 3-91
Display, 3-91
Display and Front Panel, 2-10
display elements, 2-6
Display/Hardcopy Menu, 3-90
C
Cabinet, inspection of, C-2
Cal Menu, 3-89
Calibration Conditions, 3-89
Catalog Order, 3-88
Change Directory, 3-86
Change Inhibit Control, 3-70
Cleaning
agents, C-2
compressed air, C-2
exterior, C-3
instrument cabinet, C-3
Cleaning, Inspection and cleaning procedures, C-2
E
edit cursors, 2-24
edit operations, 2-23
Enhanced, 3-77
Enhanced Action Menu, 3-43
ENTER Key, 2-3
Event, 3-70
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Index-1
Index
Event Level, 3-70
EVENT OUT Connector, 2-4
Example 1: Creating a Pattern and Storing it in a
File, 2-33
Example 2: Loading and Editing a Pattern Stored in
a File, 2-36
Example 3: Signal Output, 2-40
Example 4: Creating a Sequence, 2-49
Execute Action Menu, 3-29
EXECUTE Button, 2-3
Export, 3-16
Ext Frequency, 3-81
External Clock Input, Performance Tests, B-10
Inhibit Function, 2-10
INHIBIT IN Connector, 2-4
Inhibit Level, 3-70
Initial Inspection, 1-2
Initialize Media, 3-88
Insert, 3-56
Insert high data, 3-34
Insert low data, 3-34
Inspection, exterior, C-2
Inspection and cleaning procedures, C-2
Inspection checklist, external, C-2
Installation, 1-6
Int Frequency, 3-81
Internal Clock Frequency, Performance Tests, B-7
Invert data, 3-34
F
Factory Settings, C-4
Fall, 3-74
Fall/Rise, Output Level, Amplitude, Performance
Tests, B-28
File Menu, 3-9
FORCE TRIGGER Button, 2-3
Format, 3-92
Formating Data, CSV format, 3-14
Front Panel, 2-1
Front panel, knobs, inspection of, C-2
front-panel keypad, 2-18
G
General Purpose Knob, 2-3
GPIB, 3-95
Graycode counter, 3-41
Group allocation, 2-11
Group Assign Menu, 3-66
Group bit(s) Config, 3-68
Groups, 2-12
H
Handshake, 3-96
Hardcopy, 3-92
HARDCOPY Button, 2-3
Hardware Block Diagram, 2-8
High, 3-72
I
IEEE STD 488 Connector, 2-4
Impedance, 3-80
Import, 3-10
Index-2
J
Johnson counter, 3-41
K
keypad, 2-18
L
Level, 3-79
Level Condition, 3-72
Load Data & Setup, 3-9
Lock, 3-88
Logical Operation, 3-48
Low, 3-72
M
Magnify, 3-36
Make Directory, 3-86
Make Sequence Menu, 3-55
Mass Memory Menu, 3-86
Memory size, 2-11
MENU Buttons, 2-3
Menu Item Display, 2-17
menu notation, 2-16
Menu Operations, 2-15
Mirror horizontal, 3-36
Mirror Vertical, 3-35
Monitor, cleaning, C-3
Move cursor to prev/next block, 3-22
Move cursor to prev/next edge in selected group,
3-22
Move cursor to prev/next index, 3-22
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Index
Move to block (any), 3-25
Move to block end, 3-25
Move to block start, 3-25
Move to next block, 3-25
Move to previous block, 3-25
Power Cord Identification, 1-8
Power Cord Options, 1-4
Power Off, 1-11
Power On, 1-9
Power Supply Fuse Holder, 2-4
Power up Pause, 3-96
PRINCIPLE POWER SWITCH, 2-4
Procedures, inspection and cleaning, C-2
Product Description, 1-1
N
New, 3-18
Nominal Traits, A-9
Numeric Input, 2-18
Numeric input, 3-36
numeric input example, 2-19
Numeric Keys, 2-3
R
Rear Panel, 2-4
Remote Port, 3-94
Rename, 3-68, 3-86
Rename current block, 3-28
Repackaging for Shipment, C-1
Repeat, 3-75
Repeat Count, 3-57
Reset All bits Assign, 3-68
Reset to Factory, 3-97
Resize current block, 3-28
Rise, 3-74
Rise/Fall, Output Level, Amplitude, Performance
Tests, B-28
Rotate down, 3-41
Rotate left, 3-40
Rotate region left/right, 3-22
Rotate region up/down, 3-22
Rotate right, 3-40
Rotate up, 3-41
RS–232–C, Serial, 3-96
RS232C Connector, 2-4
Run Mode Menu, 3-75
Run Modes, 2-13
O
ON/STBY Button, 2-2
Operating Modes Overview, 2-13
Option 01 (24 Channel Output), 1-3
Option 1R (Rack Mount), 1-3
Optional Accessories, 1-5
Options, 1-3
Output Channel, 2-9
Output channel allocation, 2-11
Output Condition Menu, 3-68
Output Connectors, 2-2, 2-4
Output Level, Amplitude, Rise/Fall, Performance
Tests, B-28
P
Parity, 3-96
Paste insert, 3-32
Paste-replace, 3-33
Pattern Data, 2-12
Pattern data, 2-11
Pattern Data Display Format, 2-21
Pattern Generation Unit, 2-9
Performance Conditions, A-1
Performance Tests, B-7
Delay Time, B-33
External Clock Input, B-10
Internal Clock Frequency, B-7
Output Level, Amplitude, Rise/Fall, B-28
Sequence, Digital Output, B-12
Place mark here, 3-19
PLL, 3-82
Point cursor, 2-24
Port, 3-92
Power Connector, 2-4
S
Save Data & Setup, 3-9
Security Immediate, 3-97
Select arrow key function, 3-21
Self Tests, B-5
Sequence Data, 2-13
Sequence data, 2-11
Sequence, Digital Output, Performance Tests, B-12
Serial Code Converter, 3-51
Serial, RS–232–C, 3-96
Set data to high, 3-33
Set data to low, 3-33
Set Enhanced Control, 3-57
Set memory size, 3-20
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Index-3
Index
Set scope, 3-31
Set view type to binary, 3-24
Set view type to table, 3-23
Set view type to timing, 3-23
Setting the Pattern Data Display Format, 3-23
Setting Values with the General Purpose Knob, 2-20
Settings Menu, 3-19
Setup Data, 2-12
Setup data, 2-11
Shift left, 3-38
Shift left (add zero), 3-38
Shift region left/right, 3-22
Shift region left/right (add zero), 3-22
Shift region up/down, 3-22
Shift region up/down (add zero), 3-22
Shift Register Generator, 3-45
Shift right, 3-38
Shift right (add zero), 3-38
Show overview, 3-24
Side and Sub Menus, 2-17
Side Panel, 2-5
Single, 3-76
Slope, 3-79
Source, 3-81
Special, 3-58, 3-88
Standard Accessories, 1-4
START/STOP Button, 2-3
Startup Diagnostivs, 1-10
Status Menu, 3-99
Step, 3-77
STEP/EVENT Button, 2-3
Stop Bits, 3-96
Index-4
SYNC OUT Connector, 2-4
System Menu, 3-94
T
Table display, 2-22
Test Procedure Notes, B-4
Text Input, 2-26
Theory of operation, 2-8
Timing Condition, 3-73
Timing display, 2-21
TRIGGER INPUT, 2-3
Trigger Menu, 3-79
Typical Characteristics, A-7
U
Units Buttons, 2-3
Update, 3-78
Update Modes, 2-14
Using the keypad, 2-18
W
Warranted Characteristics, A-1
Z
Z on Stop, 3-73
DG2030 User Manual
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group is your source for quality
new and certified-used/pre-owned equipment
• FAST SHIPPING AND
DELIVERY
• TENS OF THOUSANDS OF
IN-STOCK ITEMS
• EQUIPMENT DEMOS
• HUNDREDS OF
MANUFACTURERS
SUPPORTED
• LEASING/MONTHLY
RENTALS
• ITAR CERTIFIED
SECURE ASSET SOLUTIONS
SERVICE CENTER REPAIRS
Experienced engineers and technicians on staff
at our full-service, in-house repair center
WE BUY USED EQUIPMENT
Sell your excess, underutilized, and idle used equipment
We also offer credit for buy-backs and trade-ins
www.artisantg.com/WeBuyEquipment
InstraView REMOTE INSPECTION
LOOKING FOR MORE INFORMATION?
Visit us on the web at www.artisantg.com for more
information on price quotations, drivers, technical
specifications, manuals, and documentation
SM
Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with
our interactive website at www.instraview.com
Contact us: (888) 88-SOURCE | [email protected] | www.artisantg.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement